Muratec Fax Machine F 150 User Manual

Op er a tin g In str u ction s  
For Muratecs F-150, F-120 and  
F-100 plain-paper fax machines  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Welcome …  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Muratec America, Inc.,  
has determined that this product meets  
the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.  
Copyright © 1998 by Muratec America, Inc.; all rights reserved.  
Muratec, the Muratec logo and all Muratec fax product names contained herein are trademarks of Muratec America, Inc.  
ENERGY STAR is a registered mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Welcome to your Muratec fax machine!  
We know you want to use your machine now, without first having to  
climb over a mountain of jargon.  
Find your serial number and write it down  
So weve divided these instructions into three sections.  
Bar  
code  
label  
Before you go any further, please note that  
your machines serial number is located on the  
bar code label as shown on the drawing at  
right. Its probably a good idea for you to copy  
this down before you set up your machine.  
Use the blank at the bottom of this column.  
“Gettin g sta r ted ” (see page 1.1) covers only what you absolutely  
have to know to use your machine immediately.  
“Beyon d th e ba sics” (see page 2.1) provides more details. When  
you have time, look through it to learn more about your machines  
many features, as well as fax in general.  
Note: The IC label and ID label, required by  
government regulations, do not con-  
tain serial number information.  
IC and ID labels  
Finally, “J u st in ca se … ” (see page 3.1) will help you decide what  
to do if you ever have a problem with your machine. It also tells  
you how to give it the kind of easy, sensible care that should help  
keep troubles to a minimum.  
Close up, the bar code label looks some-  
thing like this:  
The next two pages show the entire contents of these instructions.  
Skim through them now if youd like (theyll prove more helpful as  
time passes), or just go on past them to Getting started” and, well,  
get started!  
Im p or ta n t: Of course, this is not the number which should appear on your  
machines label. Rather, this is only to give you an idea of how your  
label will look.  
And thanks for choosing Muratec.  
Now, please copy down your machines serial number, below, for future reference,  
as well as noting the machines model number:  
My machines serial number: ________________________________________  
My machines model number:  
o F-150  
o F-120  
o F-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Whats in these operating instructions  
Note: Each section also contains its own (more abbreviated) table of contents, as well.  
Getting started  
Whats in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1  
Beyond the basics  
Whats in this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1  
A quick introduction to fax in general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1  
Make sure its out of the packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
What are all the parts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
What do the keys do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Youre in control! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5  
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
Pick an installation spot before going ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
Please heed these power-ful tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
Install the printing supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
When you install a new drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Attach the paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Plug in and power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Setting the paper size for the multipurpose tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Adjust the monitor speakers volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Attaching a second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Attaching an optional handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Clearing settings before beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
What do you want to do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Using EasyStart to enter initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Some guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Adjusting the machine for larger documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
How to insert a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Using memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15  
Sending a fax with on-hook dialing or a handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16  
If the call doesnt go through: redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16  
An introduction to Review Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18  
So whats the big deal, anyway?!? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18  
Different ways to get the job done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18  
Tel Ready mode: when Auto Answer is off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18  
Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
When the paper runs out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20  
Getting everything just the way you want it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Setting up for scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Using U4/CODE to enter characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
Making settings for printing faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
Making settings for copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4  
Setting the number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
Setting ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
Setting silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Setting the transmission confirmation stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Printing your settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Printing a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8  
Autodialer basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8  
Considering call groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9  
Using one-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9  
Using speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12  
Printing a call group directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15  
EasyDial directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15  
Its a great phone, too . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
On-hook dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
You can EasyDial regular phone calls, too . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
The basics of broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
Delayed broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
Relay broadcasting and relay broadcast initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19  
Broadcast news; or, making changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20  
The time machine: delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21  
Setting up a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21  
Reviewing or cancelling delayed commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22  
Printing a delayed command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23  
Printing a stored document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basket cases: batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24  
Creating or modifying a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24  
Erasing an empty batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25  
Printing a list of your batch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26  
Storing a document for batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26  
Printing a list of stored batch documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26  
Printing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26  
Erasing a document stored in a batch box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28  
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28  
Managing your fax with its journal and reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29  
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
OneLine + distinctive ring detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33  
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34  
Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
The power of TriAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36  
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36  
Programming a delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36  
Programming a broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37  
Programming a SecureMail transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.38  
Programming a relay broadcast initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.39  
Programming regular and database polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40  
Programming batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42  
Programmable one-touch fax dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.42  
Erasing a programmable one-touch key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43  
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.43  
Keeping things secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
The key to it all: the passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
Locking up tight: operation protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
Print it later, when its safe: security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45  
Receiving and sending SecureMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46  
Masking the PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49  
Setting security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52  
Setting for use of a closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52  
Setting Block J unk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52  
Using department codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.54  
Custom settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
A special note about memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
Sending pages of unlimited length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
Setting scanner width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.57  
J ust in case …  
Whats inside this section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1  
Were on-line to help you! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1  
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2  
If an original document jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2  
If a printout jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2  
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4  
Figuring out communications problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
LCD error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8  
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11  
Cleaning tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11  
Keep the air vents clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11  
Corrective cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12  
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Were on-line to help you! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
General questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15  
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15  
Working with your answering machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15  
How your fax machine works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17  
Appendix and index  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1  
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.2  
United States of America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.2  
Dominion of Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.2  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.3  
Limited warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.6  
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
A quick and friendly trip  
through the basics  
of your Muratec fax machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Whats inside this section  
A quick introduction to fax in general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1  
Make sure its all out of the packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
What are all the parts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
What do the keys do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4  
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Sending faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Receiving faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18  
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22  
A quick introduction to fax in general  
Whats a fax document?  
Simply put, a fax document is anything a fax user wants to fax to someone else. It  
can be just one page or as many pages as you need. Thats up to you. It can be text,  
a photograph or even your childs latest drawing!  
Whats a fax number?  
Because your fax operates on standard phone lines, a fax number is just a regular  
phone number. And, because your fax is also a high-quality, full-featured telephone,  
your fax number can be your regular phone number; just add an optional handset to  
your fax. Or you can (but this isnt necessary!) dedicate a phone number to your fax,  
letting you use one number just for ordinary voice calls and one just for fax.  
What are resolution and grayscale?  
J ust as cars are measured by engine size, and stereo systems are measured by  
watts per channel, so fax machines are measured by resolution and grayscale. So  
lets talk about these for a moment. Resolution refers to the sharpness of a fax  
transmission. Its expressed in lines per inch (lpi). An international agency has  
defined three specific levels of resolution:  
Normal (203 horizontal × 98 vertical lpi)  
Fine (203 × 196 lpi)  
Superfine (203 × 392 lpi).  
Similarly, one can judge a fax transmission by its number of grayscale levels, or  
shades of gray — really, halftones such as you might see in a newspaper photo. Its  
likely most of your fax documents will be dark text on white paper. However, when  
you want to send photographs and other shaded items, you can set your fax  
machine to transmit in 64-scale grayscale.  
So why not always set your fax machine for superfine,  
or for grayscale?  
Because these settings make your machine send more information, making trans-  
missions last longer and (on long-distance calls) driving up your phone bills. Thats  
why, as youll see, weve made it easy for you to set your fax machine for the most  
efficient, and truest, transmission of the types of documents you send!  
1.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Make sure its all out  
What are all the parts?  
of the packaging  
Note: Dont worry if some of the terms used here are unclear to you right now!  
Well explain everything fully. Once youre more familiar with these terms,  
this page will be an even handier reference to your fax machine.  
The drawing, below, shows what should be included in the packaging:  
6
7
5
8
9
4
10  
3
2
1
11  
12  
13  
14  
16  
15  
Con tr ol p a n el — The keys you use to operate your machine. (See page 1.4  
for more details.)  
1
2
F a x m a ch in e  
Telep h on e lin e cor d  
Ton er ca r tr id ge  
Dr u m ca r tr id ge  
(Th is m a n u a l)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Liqu id cr ysta l d isp la y (LCD) — The display (2-line × 20-character) which  
shows the machines status and lets you see what youre entering during vari-  
ous operations. (If the LCD is blank, the machine is off.)  
Docu m en t h op p er  
P a p er h op p er  
Docu m en t tr a y  
AC p ow er cor d  
P r in ter cover r elea se — Push this to open the printer cover.  
3
4
P r in ter cover — Opens to provide access for changing the toner and drum  
cartridges (or, occasionally, fixing printout jams).  
P r in ted d ocu m en t exit — Where the printout (fax or copy) emerges.  
5
6
P a p er h op p er Holds up the printout (fax or copy) after it emerges.  
Be sure to save the box (or boxes) and packing materials for reshipment.  
1.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sca n n er cover r elea se Pull up on this to open the scanner cover.  
7
8
Sca n n er cover — Open this (by using the scanner cover release) to provide  
access to the original document (what you put into the machine for faxing or  
copying) during occasional jams.  
Docu m en t feed er — The slot into which you place your original document  
for faxing or copying. It holds up to 50 sheets.  
9
10  
11  
12  
Docu m en t gu id es — You can adjust these to adjust for the width of the  
original document so it will feed properly into the machine.  
Docu m en t h op p er — Supports the original document for straighter feeding  
into the machine. (You can flip it shut if theres no original document loaded.)  
17  
Docu m en t tr a y — Supports documents discharged from the original docu-  
ment exit.  
Or igin a l d ocu m en t exit — Where the original document comes out.  
13  
14  
Mu ltip u r p ose tr a y — One of two locations where you put the recording  
paper (the paper cassette is the other). Holds up to 150 sheets, either letter- or  
legal-sized.  
LINE EXT.TEL HANDSET  
P a p er ca ssette — One of two locations where you put the recording paper  
(the multipurpose tray is the other). Holds up to 500 letter-sized sheets.  
15  
16  
20 19 18  
AC p ow er sw itch — Turns your fax machine on and off.  
AC p ow er ja ck — Where you plug in the AC power cord.  
HANDSET ja ck — Where you plug in the optional handset.  
17  
18  
19  
EXT. TEL ja ck — If you connect a second telephone to your machine, this is  
where you plug in the cord.  
LINE ja ck — Where you plug in the telephone line cord. (The other end of the  
cord plugs into a wall telephone jack.)  
20  
1.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
What do the keys do?  
4
5
6 7  
8
9
10 11  
12  
13  
14  
3
2
1
a
g
b
c
d
j
e
k
f
l
h
i
m
s
n
t
o
p
q
r
u
v
w
x
y
z
30  
29  
28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15  
fliptab a  
fliptab b  
Heres a brief description of the keys on your fax machine and what they do, as well  
as a look at your machines indicator lights and their meanings.  
P RINTER ALARM ligh t — Glows when your fax machine encounters a problem  
printing a fax or copy. Check the display or an error report for more information.  
7
8
Im p or ta n t: Some of the functions well mention, here, are covered in the Beyond  
P AP ER J AM ligh t — Glows when a printout (received fax message or copy)  
becomes jammed in your fax machine.  
the basics” section.  
MEMORY RECEIVE ligh t — If glowing, indicates your fax machine is receiving  
an incoming fax document into the machines electronic memory.  
1
REP LACE P AP ER ligh t — Glows when either the multipurpose paper tray or  
paper cassette is empty. See page 1.7 for more details on replacing paper.  
9
COMMUNICATION ligh t — If glowing, advises you the fax machine is perform-  
ing communication.  
2
HOLD Either places a call on hold or takes it off hold. In certain operations,  
it also produces a special character during dialing.  
10  
11  
ALARM ligh t — If glowing, indicates a problem has occurred during fax com-  
munication. (Its also accompanied by several beeps immediately after the  
problem occurs.) The light stays lit until the machine prints a Check Message.  
3
SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX — Starts a speed-dialing operation, which you finish by  
pushing three of the keys on the numeric keypad. Also displays one-touch and  
speed-dial entries sorted alphanumerically, as in a telephone directory.  
AUTO ANSWER — Selects which mode your fax machine uses to handle incom-  
ing calls: answering automatically as a fax machine (auto-answer mode) or  
waiting for the user to pick up an optional, connected handset (manual-  
answer mode). The AUTO ANSWER ligh t next to this key will glow when  
auto-answer mode is the current choice.  
4
REDIAL/P AUSE Redials the last number you dialed. In certain operations, it  
also produces a special pause character which can be useful during the dial-  
ing of long-distance numbers.  
12  
13  
14  
Nu m er ic k eyp a d — J ust like the numeric keys on a regular tone-dialing  
phone. In addition to dialing phone and fax numbers, they also enter num-  
bers when youre making certain settings.  
MEMORY TRANSMIT — Selects which transmission mode your fax machine uses,  
whether from memory or from the document feeder. If the MEMORY TRANSMIT  
light next to this key is glowing, your machine will scan documents into mem-  
ory before trying to send them. Otherwise, your fax machine will send  
straight from the feeder, which is slower and also prevents others in your  
office from using the fax until your communication is absolutely complete.  
5
On e-tou ch k eys — The keys labeled  
fliptab b) offer one-touch dialing convenience. You also can use the keys labeled  
1–P 6 (or 7–P 12, if youre using fliptab b) for programmable functions: this  
A
Z  
and U1–U4 (or U5–U8, if youre using  
P
P
lets you teach your machine an advanced multi-step function just once, then  
recall the function at any time by pressing one of these keys. Finally, you can  
use these keys to type in letters and symbols for your user settings.  
REVIEW COMMANDS Push this to review pending fax commands, view a brief  
description of delayed commands or check other fax settings or reports.  
6
1.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Youre in control!  
Weve worked hard to make sure your fax machine is easy for you to use. You con-  
trol it not vice versa. So weve also tried to make these operating instructions just  
as easy. In that spirit, lets make sure theres no confusion about how to give your  
machine its marching orders.  
START — Begins a manual fax transmission or reception.  
15  
16  
17  
COP Y Press this key to make one copy, or multiple copies of a document.  
STOP — An all-purpose Whoa!key. Stops the current operation, ejects a doc-  
ument from the document feeder and cancels alarms.  
F LASH — Lets you quickly disconnect a call and go right to the next one with-  
out having to hang up the handset.  
To press: 0 (zero), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, # or *  
18  
19  
Use:  
Tip:  
The numeric keypad.  
At no (other) time within this manual will we refer to the letters printed  
below the numeric keys, such as abc by the 2 key. They are there only for  
your greater convenience in using your fax machine as a telephone.  
STAMP Press this key to set the machine to stamp each original document  
or page automatically when the machine transmits it successfully. The STAMP  
ligh t next to this key glows when this operation is set to occur.  
MONITOR/CALL — During on-hook dialing, it turns the monitor speaker off or  
on. When youre sending a fax, this key activates the call request feature.  
To press:  
Use:  
Tip:  
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
or any other letter key  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
The one-touch key by that name.  
Please dont confuse the zero (0) with a letter  
O.  
CANCEL Press this key to delete characters on the LCD and cancel com-  
mands you have entered into the machine.  
Heres an example. If we say press /P ROGRAM, 7, ENTER, 0, 8, ENTER” …  
DIALING OP TIONS Press this to insert special symbols into telephone num-  
bers (see page 2.8).  
… youd press  
then  
/P ROGRAM  
7
ENTER — Much as STOP is a Whoa!key, ENTER is a Go!” key. It confirms  
user settings, begins operations and moves through command levels.  
then ENTER  
then 0 (the numeric key zero)  
GROUP DIAL Helps you set up a fax transmission to a call group, a set of fax  
numbers which will receive the same document in one fax operation.  
then  
8
and then (finally) ENTER  
/P ROGRAM Scrolls (moves) through features and command options as dis-  
played on the LCD.  
Im p or ta n t: Please note that you would n ot be entering any comma or period  
characters. Those typographical characters appear in our instructions  
merely to serve their usual separative functions and are not intended  
for actual entry from your machines control panel.  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS — Chooses from among five fax options:  
delayed transmission, SecureMail transmission, relay broadcast, polling or  
batch transmission.  
(In our Internet-savvy age, when even car commercials use  
phrases such as h t t p colon slash w w w dot muracars dash x dash  
series dot com slash [etc.],” we can understand how you might other-  
wise become confused. But always keep in mind that your fax  
machine, advanced though it may be, is not a personal computer and  
doesnt accept the same kind of instructions.)  
— Scrolls through features and command options as displayed on the LCD.  
27  
28  
BROADCAST Helps you set up the process of a fax broadcast (sending the  
same document to more than one location).  
While there is a function (broadcasting) which requires the entry  
of commas, we provide special ways to do that, as well explain when  
the time comes.  
CONTRAST — When a document is in the document feeder, press this key to  
toggle among normal, dark or light contrast settings.  
29  
30  
RESOLUTION — When a document is in the document feeder, press this key to  
toggle among the three resolution modes and the halftone (grayscale) mode.  
1.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Setting up  
Pick an installation spot before going ahead  
Where should you install your fax machine? The location should be:  
Install the printing supplies  
Your fax machine prints incoming faxes and copies with a laser print engine. The  
engine requires two types of printing supplies (sometimes also called consumables):  
Clea n — Dust buildup can damage your machine. (However, do not use a cover!  
See next item.)  
The drum cartridge — It yields 20,000 normal letter-sized printouts (see Specifi-  
cations,” page AI.1). By “normal,” were referring to the amount of text and/or  
graphics on each page. This is based on an industry-standard test document.  
In th e op en — Allow at least 12of clearance around your machine. Be sure  
that you never cover the machine: its vents must be able to breathe.”  
The toner cartridge — It yields 5,500 such printouts (see Specifications,” page AI.1).  
Note: The toner cartridge included with your machine is a starter cartridge which  
yields 3,600 printouts (see Specifications,” page AI.1). Please purchase  
regular, full-yield toner cartridges from your authorized Muratec dealer.  
Aw a y fr om d ir ect su n ligh t — This helps avoid overheating.  
Dr y — Avoid any location where splatters or sprays (such as from a water foun-  
tain) could reach your fax machine.  
Level, a n d vibr a tion -fr ee.  
Heres how to install these supplies.  
Nea r a p h on e ja ck — Your fax machine uses a standard (modular) telephone  
jack, also known as an RJ -11.  
Nea r a n AC p ow er ou tlet — The AC power cord is about 5long when stretched  
Swing open the printer  
1
to its limit (and thats not the way to handle a power cord).  
cover by pressing the  
printer cover release.  
Speaking of which …  
Please heed these power-ful tips  
Unpack the drum cartridge from its box.  
2
Use a sta n d a r d th r ee-pr on ged 120 VAC ou tlet.  
Im p or ta n t: Sh ield th e d r u m ca r tr id ge fr om ligh t, esp ecia lly str on g  
ligh t. Later, if you have to remove the cartridge from the fax,  
immediately wrap it in a thick cloth to protect it from light.  
Ma k e su r e th e ou tlet isn t con tr olled by a w a ll sw itch .  
If it is, youll risk inadvertent shutoffs of your machine, causing  
you to lose fax messages.  
Don t u se a n ou tlet w h ich a lso is su p p lyin g p ow er to a  
la r ge a p p lia n ce, such a refrigerator or air conditioner.  
Such high-consumption appliances can cause draw-downs”  
(temporary drops in the power available for other equipment on  
the circuit) which could damage your fax machine.  
Put the drum cartridge into the printer  
by aligning the cartridges protrusions  
with the slits inside the printer frame.  
3
If at all possible, u se a n electr ica l su r ge su ppr essor , preferably one which  
guards both telephone and electrical lines. This device helps to shield your fax  
machine from damaging high-voltage electrical surges.  
Im p or ta n t: You must also reset the  
drum counter. See When  
you install a new drum  
Volta ge r equ ir em en ts:  
120 VAC ± 10%, 50–60% Hz.  
P ow er con su m p tion :  
F -150  
Standby Transmission Reception  
Copying  
Maximum*  
cartridge …” (page 1.7).  
15W  
14W  
41W  
37W  
379W  
373W  
374W  
396W  
F -120/F -100  
372W  
396W  
* F-150 and F-120; simultaneous copying, communicating and scanning.  
1.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Loading paper  
Of course, one of your fax machines most outstanding features is how it prints  
faxes and makes copies on plain paper! Now, everything that comes out of your fax  
machine is ready for distribution or archiving, right from the start.  
Unpack the toner cartridge from its carton.  
Then, holding the toner cartridge with both  
hands, shake it well as shown (note the arrows).  
4
5
The following instructions tell you how to load the recording paper the paper on  
which the fax machine makes its printouts (copies and received faxes). Your  
machine can hold up to 650 sheets at a time: 500 sheets in the paper cassette and  
150 sheets in the multipurpose tray.  
Install the toner cartridge in the printer, making sure that the cartridges  
four pins (two each at the front and rear sides) fit in the slits inside the  
printer frame.  
Loading the paper cassette  
Pull forward on the paper cassette to slide it out.  
1
Insert up to 500 letter-sized sheets into the cas-  
sette, placing the edges of the top sheet under the  
metal tabs on the left side of the cassette (viewed  
2
from the cassettes front, as shown).  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure to load the cassette with  
only letter-sized paper.  
Push the paper cassette back into its original  
(closed) position. Youll feel a click when its properly in place.  
3
Swing the printer cover back down. Push  
down on a portion of the cover to lock the  
cover into its normal position.  
6
Loading the multipurpose tray  
You may use either letter- or legal-sized paper in the multipurpose tray, but not  
both at the same time; dont mix the sizes.  
Note: The fax machine will not work if the  
cover isnt closed properly.  
Paper-width guide  
Adjust the multipurpose tray for the  
1
Paper-length guide  
length of paper you plan to load. Pull  
slightly upward on the paper-length  
guide in the cassette, then slide the  
guide to the slot (either LTR or LGL) for  
the paper size youll be loading.  
When you install a new drum cartridge  
Im p or ta n t: Use this setting only when you are installing a new drum cartridge.  
Your fax machine keeps track of how many pages go through the drum cartridge to  
let you know when the drum needs to be replaced. Thus, whenever you install a  
new drum cartridge, you must notify” the machine by resetting the drum counter.  
(Obviously, before doing so the very first time, youll have to finish installing the  
machine and then turn it on [see page 1.8].) Heres how to reset this counter:  
Im p or ta n t: You must set your machine to recognize the size of paper youve  
loaded (see page 1.8 for details).  
Slightly fan” the paper you will be loading, to help ensure smooth feeding.  
2
3
Press /P ROGRAM, , 2, 1, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
J
1
Insert up to 150 sheets of paper into the tray. Make sure the paper-length  
guide and the paper-width guide now fit against the papers edges.  
Reset Drum Life  
Check Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: To avoid paper jams, do not refill this tray without first remov-  
ing all of any paper which may remain in it. In other words,  
dont just add sheets to an already-loaded stack.  
Press ENTER to reset the drum counter.  
2
1.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Attach the paper-handling parts  
Use the AC power switch to turn on your  
machine. The markings are international  
standards: I means on, O means off.  
4
Attach the document  
tray by inserting it  
into the appropriate  
holes, as shown.  
1
Setting the paper size for the multipurpose tray  
The multipurpose tray can hold either letter- or legal-sized paper for your machine.  
All you have to do is tell the machine which size the tray is using.  
Attach the paper hopper into the  
appropriate hole, as shown. Press  
gently until the hopper wont go  
in any farther.  
Document  
hopper  
2
3
Paper hopper  
Im p or ta n t: The paper cassette (as opposed to the tray) uses only letter-sized paper.  
Im p or ta n t: If you use a different size from the size you set here, the machine  
Attach the document hopper by  
inserting its two pegs at a slightly  
upward angle into the appropri-  
ate holes, as shown.  
wont print; so perform this setting whenever you load a different size.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows the trays current setting:  
J
1
Paper Size: Letter  
Program/Enter  
Plug in and power up  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Plug one end of the telephone line  
cord into the LINE jack on the  
machines rear side. Plug the other  
end of the cord into a standard tele-  
phone wall jack, just as you would  
plug in a phone.  
To change the setting, press  
paper size appears. In this example, weve chosen legal-sized paper.  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
1
2
3
Paper Size: Legal  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Note: If you have purchased an  
optional handset, do not confuse its curled handset cord with the  
uncurled telephone line cord.  
Adjust the monitor speakers volume  
Note: Well get to the HANDSET and EXT.TEL ja ck s shortly (see page 1.9).  
You can set the volume of the monitor speaker, assuring that on-hook dialing will  
be as loud (or as soft) as you require.  
Plug the non-pronged end of the AC power cord  
into the AC power cord jack on the left side of the  
machine (as viewed from the machines front).  
Press MONITOR/CALL on the control panel. You now should hear a dial tone,  
and the display will show:  
2
3
1
** Tel Mode **  
_
Plug the pronged end of the AC power cord into a 120 VAC electrical outlet  
(preferably on a surge suppressor, as mentioned on page 1.6).  
Im p or ta n t: If you dont hear a dial tone, make sure your fax machine is  
plugged into a working phone line.  
1.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
If the volume you hear is satisfactory, skip to step 4. Otherwise, go on to step 3.  
2
3
Using the plug mentioned in step 1,  
plug the phone cable from your  
second phone into the EXT. TEL jack  
on the rear of your fax machine.  
2
Adjust the volume as you wish:  
To turn the volume up, press /P ROGRAM. To turn the volume down, press  
The display, or LCD, indicates the volume. Here are the possible settings:  
.
** Tel Mode **  
For information on how to use a connected  
second phone with your fax machine, see  
Receiving faxes,” beginning on page 1.18.  
Volume:n n n n n n  
= Loudest setting.  
= Medium setting.  
= Low setting.  
** Tel Mode **  
Volume:n  
n n n  
Attaching an optional handset  
If you purchase an optional handset for your fax machine, it comes with installation  
** Tel Mode **  
Volume:n  
n
instructions. However, here is a summary of how to attach the handset.  
** Tel Mode **  
Volume:  
Im p or ta n t: Do not connect the handset directly to a telephone wall jack. Connect  
= Volume off.  
the handset only to your fax machine as the instructions describe.  
Using a small Phillips-head screwdriver, attach the handset cradle to the side  
of your fax machine using the screws included with the cradle.  
Press MONITOR/CALL again to hang up.  
1
4
LINE EXT.TEL HANDSET  
Plug one end of the handset cord (its curled) into the  
HANDSET jack on the rear of your fax machine.  
2
Attaching a second phone  
Want to attach a second phone (even a cordless model!) to your fax machine, so they  
can share the same phone jack? No problem.  
Plug the other end of the handset cord into the jack on the handset. If con-  
nected to a phone line, your fax machine is now off-hook.”  
3
Note: The handset has a small flash” button which you can press while  
holding the handset, putting the fax machine back on-hook” until you  
can hang up the handset properly in step 4.  
Before we go further, lets explain the idea. Youre plugging the second phones  
phone line into your fax machines EXT. TEL jack, not the wall phone jack. In such a  
setup, only your fax machine connects to the wall. The second phone receives phone  
signals through your fax machine.  
Place the telephone handset onto the handset cradle. The cradle will press  
the handsets “flash” button, hanging up the handset.  
4
Now, lets proceed …  
If your second phone is already plugged into a wall phone jack, disconnect it  
from that jack, at the jack. Hold onto the phone plug; youll need it in step 2.  
1
Installation complete!  
Now, see how our EasyStart feature will have  
you up and running — within just minutes.  
Note: Of course, if your second phone is a model which also requires AC  
power, as is true for the base of a cordless phone, dont unplug it from  
its AC power jack!  
1.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
EasyStart  
Your Muratec fax machine comes with EasyStart. It guides you in entering the  
bare-bones settings required for normal operation — so its easy for you to start  
using your machine quickly. (Of course, you can make other settings later or change  
these settings. Well explain in Beyond the basics,” beginning on page 2.1.)  
Th e n a m e a n d fa x n u m ber you w ish to a p p ea r on you r fa xes —  
Every fax page you send will arrive at the receiving machine with a single  
line of text at the very top of the page. Among other things, this text will list a  
name and a fax number. The name must not be longer than 25 characters.  
2
Im p or ta n t: At the end of EasyStart, your machine will print a list of its settings.  
So, first, please be sure youve correctly installed your machine and  
loaded recording paper into it (see Setting up,” beginning on page 1.6).  
Note: Incidentally, the fax industry term for this text is Transmit Terminal  
Identifier (TTI). (Another term, Subscriber ID, refers to just the fax  
number in the TTI.)  
Clearing settings before beginning  
Using EasyStart to enter initial settings  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure your fax machine has paper before you begin EasyStart, since  
Before using EasyStart, clear your machines built-in user data memory, which  
stores settings. This insures the memory will hold only your settings.  
this feature can print a handy settings list at the conclusion.  
Im p or ta n t: After you use EasyStart, please do not clear the memory again unless  
an authorized technician asks you to do so.  
To clear the machines memory:  
Im p or ta n t: If you press STOP during EasyStart, your fax machine will return to  
standby mode (its normal condition) but will retain what settings you  
saved by pressing ENTER as described in these instructions.  
Press /P ROGRAM, *, 2. The LCD now asks whether youre sure about clearing  
the memory:  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
The LCD will display the current setting of the faxs built-in calendar/clock,  
with a cursor appearing under the first digit.  
I
,
ENTER.  
1
1
Clear User Settings  
Check Program/Enter  
Enter Time  
Note: If you dont want to proceed, just press /P ROGRAM.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the correct date and time, using a YYMMDD  
format for the date and 24-hour (“military) format for the time. For instance,  
to set 8:30 PM on September 11, 1998, press 9 8 0 9 1 1 2 0 3 0, which results in:  
If you are sure, press ENTER to complete the process by cancelling the existing  
user data memory settings.  
2
2
Enter Time  
What do you want to do?  
EasyStart will want you to enter a little information; so, first, please determine the  
following before you proceed:  
Note: Your fax machine automatically inserts the spaces and date-slash. All  
you have to do is enter the digits.  
Th e typ e of d ia lin g your telephone system requires — You may select  
1
To change only one digit, press  
to move the cursor leftward, or  
/P ROGRAM  
either tone or pulse (rotary) dialing.  
to move it rightward, to that digit. Then, enter the correct digit.  
Press ENTER to save the clock setting and continue EasyStart.  
3
1.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
The LCD now asks you to enter the name you want it to appear at the top of  
The LCD now asks whether you want to set the calendar/clock for automatic  
recognition of daylight saving time (DST).  
4
5
10  
faxes you send. The name may be up to 22 characters in length.  
Im p or ta n t: You enter letters and other non-numeric characters through the  
Daylight Saving:Off  
Program/Enter  
one-touch keys.  
Your Name :Upper  
_
When the setting is On, your machine automatically will set itself to DST or to  
standard time, depending upon the calendar setting, at 2 AM on the appropriate  
switchover” Sundays each year.  
When the setting is Off, no such automatic change will occur.  
(We have provided this choice because some areas do not observe DST.)  
The word Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only  
upper-case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
To change it so that pressing a one-touch key will produce a lower-case letter  
rather than an upper-case letter, press U2/a bc. The display will change to:  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 6.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 5.  
Your Name :Lower  
_
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your choice  
appears (here, weve changed the setting to On):  
Daylight Saving:On  
Program/Enter  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
To switch back for upper-case entries, press U1/ABC.  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
6
7
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, press U3/SYMBOL. This lets you  
enter the blue characters shown on the one-touch keypad.  
The LCD now asks you to enter your fax number as you want it to appear on  
other fax machines’ displays or printouts. The fax industry term for this num-  
ber is Subscriber ID.  
In Beyond the Basics,” well show you how to use the CODE function at  
U4/CODE to enter a wide variety of characters (see page 2.3). For now, how-  
ever, become familiar with the ABC, a bc and SYMBOL keys.  
Your Fax Number  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want  
to change just one character in the name, press to move the cursor  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number. To put in a dash for  
easier reading, as shown here, press DIALING OP TIONS once. The number may  
contain up to 20 characters (numbers and dashes).  
leftward, or /P ROGRAM, to move it rightward, to that character.  
Then re-enter until the name is just as you want it.  
8
9
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
11  
12  
Your Fax Number  
972-555-5525  
The LCD now indicates the type of dialing, tone or pulse, for which your fax  
machine is set:  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want  
Phone Type: Tone  
Program/Enter  
to change just one character in the number, press  
to move the cur-  
sor leftward, or /P ROGRAM, to move it rightward, to that character.  
Then re-enter until the fax number is just as you want it.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 14.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 13.  
Press ENTER to save the number.  
1.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
To change the setting, press  
appears (here, weve changed the setting to Pulse mode):  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your choice  
13  
Phone Type: Pulse  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
14  
15  
One more thing to do! The LCD now asks whether you want to print a list of  
all of its settings (including some well cover in “Beyond the Basics,” which  
begins on page 2.1).  
Print Setting List  
Enter/Stop  
If you want to print a list, press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a list of  
all of its settings (including some well cover in “Beyond the Basics).  
If you dont want to print a list, press STOP . Your machine will return to  
standby mode.  
Either way, youre all done!  
1.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sending faxes  
Contrast  
Some guidelines  
The rightmost item appearing on the LCD (when theres a document in the feeder) is  
the contrast setting. You have three choices:  
How big — and small — your pages can be  
While youll probably be sending normal-sized documents the vast majority of the  
time, you can fax a piece of paper as small as a notepad sheet or nearly 3long!  
Normal (“NORM” on the control panel) — Suited to most documents.  
Light — Lightens up overly dark, muddy” original documents.  
Dark — Darkens weak, washed-out” images.  
To be precise, the acceptable dimensions (width × length) are:  
SINGLE-SHEET TRANSMISSION  
MULTIPLE-SHEET TRANSMISSION  
Maximum:  
Minimum:  
Note: Until you become accustomed to using the Light and Dark settings, you  
might tend to confuse them. J ust remember what we say above — Light  
lightens” and Dark darkens” — to keep it straight!  
Maximum:  
Minimum:  
11.0×35.4″  
10.1×14.4″  
5.8″ × 4.1″  
5.8″ × 4.1″  
Things not to put in your fax  
To help avoid troubles ranging from paper jams to out-and-out damage to your  
machine, please d on t in ser t:  
Entering a pause character when dialing  
Your fax machine provides special dialing characters which you may find useful.  
Well discuss most of them later (see page 2.8), but you may need to know now  
about the pause character. Some long-distance systems require dialing pauses, and  
pauses can be useful also when youre dialing through special telephone exchanges.  
Folded, curled, torn, wrinkled or very thin pages  
Documents with staples, glue, tape, paper clips or still-wet correction fluid  
Sticky notes” (or documents with sticky notes” attached)  
Cardboard, newspaper or fabric  
To insert a pause character, just press REDIAL/P AUSE (after youve dialed at least one  
other character). -/(the pause character) will appear on the display.  
Each pause you enter lasts for a factory-set five seconds (see Changing the pause  
length,” next page, for how to change this setting).  
For example, assuming the pause is at the factory setting, pressing 9,  
REDIAL/P AUSE, 19725552009 dials 9 [5-second pause] 1 9 7 2 5 5 5 2 0 0 9.  
Pages with duplicating carbon on either side  
Credit cards or similar small, thick items  
Some thoughts on resolution, grayscale and contrast  
Im p or ta n t: Each pause uses two of the characters youre allowed in a number.  
Reviewing resolution and grayscale  
Normal resolution (“NORM” on the control panel) is suitable for most typed docu-  
ments and simple drawings.  
Fine resolution (“FINE” on the control panel) is ideal for maps, moderately compli-  
cated drawings, floorplans or handwritten documents.  
Superfine resolution (“S-FINE” on the control panel; S Fine” on the LCD) repro-  
duces the detail of extremely complicated drawings or line art.  
Grayscale mode (“HALFTONE” on the control panel; Gray” on the LCD) captures  
shades in photos and drawings.  
Note: If you send a fax in superfine, certain fax models (especially older, non-  
Muratec models) will receive it only in fine mode. However, you can send a  
fax in grayscale mode to virtually any fax machine currently in use.  
1.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Changing the pause length  
How to insert a document  
The pause is set by the factory to last five seconds, but you can set it to last as long  
as ten seconds if necessary. If you find the five-second pause is satisfactory when  
you use it with your phone system, do not make this change. But, if you must:  
Adjust the document guides — by sliding either of them to the left or right —  
to fit the page (s) youll be faxing. Your fax machines automatic document  
feeder will hold up to 50 pages.  
1
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 5, ENTER.  
J
1
Note: If your machines scanning width (see page 2.2) is set for A4” (its only  
such setting if its either an F-120 or F-100) and you insert a letter-  
sized document, your machine scans the center 8.2and sends it  
unreduced (see pages 2.3–2.4 for more on reduction). This means that  
there will be a 0.15margin on each side of the page which your fax  
machine will not scan.  
Set Dialing Pause  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired length of the dialing pause.  
Here, weve chosen nine seconds.  
2
If youre sending a multi-page document, fan”  
the pages slightly. The bottom sheet should  
extend just slightly from the others.  
2
Set Dialing Pause  
Insert the document fa ce u p . The fax machine  
will grab” the first page of the document and  
position it for faxing. (If need be, readjust the  
document guides for the best fit.)  
3
Note: The length setting requires two digits, so there always must be a lead-  
ing zero for lengths other than 10 seconds.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
The LCD will now show the current scanning  
width setting (see A4, B4, A3” in the Glossary  
that begins on page 3.17) and the amount of memory available:  
Potential problems with call-waiting and voice mail  
Telephone call-waiting signals can stop fax transmission and reception. And, of  
course, any service — such as voice mail — which may intercept your calls can keep  
your fax machine from getting fax calls.  
Document Ready  
Speaking of memory . . .  
If you must use only one phone line, please consult your telephone company for  
information on how you can temporarily disable call-waiting or voice mail while  
using the fax machine.  
Using memory transmission  
Your fax machine has a great memory! And, because it does, it can finish fax jobs  
more quickly than otherwise would be possible. By automatically scanning your  
document into, then transmitting from, its memory — rather than transmitting  
each part of the scan only as quickly as the receiving fax machine can receive it —  
your fax machine can hand you back your original document more rapidly.  
Adjusting the machine for larger documents  
If youre using larger documents, you can adjust the document hopper and the docu-  
ment tray. J ust flip the top up or down, as appropriate for your documents’ sizes.  
Also, heres a real money-saver on long-distance fax calls: if youre transmitting to  
another memory-equipped Muratec fax machine, your machine will send the docu-  
ment directly into the other machines memory and hang up! (The receiving  
machine then prints out your message from its memory.) This cuts your actual on-  
line time to a minimum.  
Better still: set up a delayed command (see pages 2.21–2.23) to send your document  
to that other Muratec fax machine after hours, and youll save two ways on the call:  
not only will the call itself be short, but also the line charges will be cheaper!  
1.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
You can set your fax always to transmit from memory as a default.  
Toggle” (switch on or off) memory transmission if necessary.  
If you want to use your default setting, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, press MEMORY TRANSMIT once to toggle” memory transmission.  
3
4
Note: Whichever choice you make, you can override that choice one transmission  
at a time by pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT. After completing the communica-  
tion, your fax will return to your desired transmission setting.  
Enter the fax number.  
(In fax terms, youre calling the remote fax, on its remote fax number.)  
Note: Although its probably best to decide to transmit from memory, be aware that  
certain types of documents can quickly exhaust even your machines large  
memory supply. Obviously, documents with large numbers of pages qualify;  
so do documents with lots of dark areas, since darker pages create more  
data for your fax machine to remember” and send. When the machines  
memory supply is full, it can transmit only in normal (i. e., non-memory)  
mode.  
Press Start  
919725552009_  
As you can see, you also enter any access codes (such as a 9 for “dialing out”  
from an office telephone system, or 1 for long-distance) along with the num-  
ber, just as you would for a regular phone call.  
To make memory transmission the default:  
Press START.  
5
6
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 4, ENTER.  
1
Now, everything is up to the machines — yours and the one youre dialing.  
Memory Tx:  
On  
Program/Enter  
If you have set the fax to transmit from memory, your machine will first  
scan the document into memory, then dial the other fax. When it makes  
contact, your machine transmits the stored document from memory.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
If the fax is set for non-memory transmission, your machine simply dials  
the other fax. When it makes contact, your machine feeds the document  
through, scanning and transmitting it as it goes.  
To change the setting, press  
mode appears. In this example, weve chosen Off.  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
2
3
Note: The more stuff” (or black coverage, to use the fax term) your machine  
sees” on a page, the more slowly the page will feed through as the fax  
scans it — especially when you transmit in non-memory mode. Even  
if the page itself is relatively clean, sending it in grayscale mode or  
certain resolution settings makes your machine see” more stuff.”  
The same is true if you set the contrast to Dark.  
Memory Tx:  
Off  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Note: What if the call fails for some reason? See If the call doesnt go  
Sending  
through: redialing,” next page.  
Im p or ta n t: If you wish to cancel a transmission while it is in progress, you  
will need to use the Review Commands function. See An intro-  
duction to Review Commands,” page 1.17.  
Heres how to fax a document:  
Insert the document.  
1
When a document is in the feeder, the LCD shows the current scanning width  
setting (see A4, B4, A3” in the Glossary beginning on page 3.17) and the  
amount of memory available:  
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
7
972-555-2009  
** Complete **  
Document Ready  
Im p or ta n t: Whenever you transmit, whether this way or in the numerous  
ways well describe throughout this manual, what actually  
appears on the top line of the display will depend upon how the  
remote fax machine is set. The line may even be blank.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. If these are OK, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, press RESOLUTION to change the resolution and/or press CONTRAST  
to change the contrast.  
2
1.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Sending a fax with on-hook dialing or a handset  
You also can fax a document by dialing using either the monitor speaker (This is  
called on-hook” dialing) or the optional handset.  
If the call doesnt go through: redialing  
If the call fails (and you were using neither the monitor speaker or an optional handset),  
your machine will redial, automatically, the fax call you just tried. While in this Auto  
Redial mode, the machine can receive faxes and make as many as 99 fax transmissions.  
Notes: On an F-150, faxing this way disables V.34” mode and sends the fax in nor-  
If you dialed without using either the monitor speaker or an optional handset, your  
fax automatically redials the number every few minutes (you set the interval; see  
Making redial settings,” next page) until one of these happens first:  
mal ITU-T Group 3 fashion.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
It reaches the remote fax machine.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. If these are OK, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, press RESOLUTION to change the resolution and/or press CONTRAST  
to change the contrast.  
It has automatically redialed the number for the last try (again, see Making  
redial settings,” next page).  
Notes: If you used either the speaker or a handset, redial manually (see below).  
Obtain a dial tone. You can do this by either:  
3
If the last try fails, your machine may print (and/or display) error messages.  
For more information, see pages 3.6–3.9.  
Activating the monitor speaker (by pressing MONITOR/CALL)  
… or …  
Lifting an optional handset.  
Redialing manually  
You always can redial fax or voice calls manually; and, again, you must redial man-  
In either case, the LCD shows:  
ually if you dialed by using either the monitor speaker or an optional handset.  
** Tel Mode **  
_
To redial a fax call manually without using the monitor speaker or an optional hand-  
set:  
Enter the fax number by using the numeric keypad.  
4
Confirm that the document is still in the feeder and that your desired resolu-  
tion and contrast settings are still correct.  
Note: For information on entering one-touch and speed-dial numbers, see  
1
pages 2.8–2.16.  
Press REDIAL/P AUSE, START.  
2
** Tel Mode **  
919725552009_  
To redial a fax call manually by using the monitor speaker or an optional handset:  
Enter access codes along with the number, just as for a regular phone call.  
Confirm that the document is still in the feeder and that your desired resolu-  
tion and contrast settings are still correct.  
1
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.  
5
6
Obtain a dial tone: either press MONITOR/CALL or lift the optional handset.  
Note: If a person answers the phone, tell him or her youre trying to send a  
2
3
4
fax. When his/her machine sends you fax tones, then press START.  
Press REDIAL/P AUSE.  
If youre using the monitor speaker, skip to step 7.  
If youre using an optional handset, hang up (after pressing START).  
When you hear fax tones from the remote unit, press START.  
Note: What if the call fails for some reason? See If the call doesnt go  
Note: If a person answers the phone, tell him or her youre trying to send a  
through: redialing,” next column.  
fax. When his/her machine sends you fax tones, then press START.  
At the end of the operation, your fax machine beeps and displays:  
7
972-555-2009  
** Complete **  
1.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
To redial a voice call (using the optional handset) manually:  
An introduction to Review Commands  
Obtain a dial tone: either press MONITOR/CALL or lift the optional handset.  
To cancel either an in-progress transmission or an automatic redial, youll use the  
Review Commands function. First, a bit of explanation, however . . .  
1
2
Press REDIAL/P AUSE. When the other person answers, speak to him/her on the  
optional handset.  
Because your fax machine can store multiple transmission commands in memory,  
it keeps track of each command by assigning it a command number — e. g., “C00.”  
When your machine stores a document for either normal sending from the feeder  
(i. e., as opposed to using on-hook dialing or a handset) or automatic redial, that  
makes that document one of those stored commands.  
Making redial settings  
Its up to you how many times the fax redials a number and how long it waits during  
redials (thats called the redial interval). Heres how to make those settings:  
The Review Commands function gives you the power not only to check on (review)  
each command currently pending in your machines memory but also to delete a  
command if you decide not to go ahead with the command and send the document.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 7, ENTER.  
J
1
2
Set # Of Redials  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
The LCD shows the first command, indicated by its command number and the  
phone number the command will dial. If a command is in progress, that will  
be the first command the LCD shows:  
1
If the number of redialings you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
C00:5552009  
To change the setting, use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of  
redialings, as few as two or as many as 15. In this example, weve entered 03,  
for three.  
If this is the command you want to cancel, skip to step 4.  
If this is not the command you want to cancel, proceed to step 3.  
2
Set # Of Redials  
Press /P ROGRAM to continue on to the next command in the command  
queue, then go back to step 2.  
3
Im p or ta n t: Notice that you must enter a leading zero when setting a quan-  
tity lower than 10.  
Press CANCEL. The LCD shows:  
4
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
C00:5552009  
3
4
The LCD now shows:  
If you do want to cancel this command, press CANCEL again.  
Set Redial Interval  
5
6
The LCD now shows the next command.  
If you want to cancel it, too, go back to step 4.  
If you want to avoid cancelling this command but do want to review other  
commands in the queue, press /P ROGRAM and go back to step 2.  
If you want to stop reviewing the stored commands, press STOP to return the  
machine to standby mode.  
If the redial interval (in minutes) you see is acceptable, skip to step 6.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 5.  
To change the setting, use the numeric keypad to enter the desired length (in  
minutes). You may enter 3, 4 or 5. In this example, weve chosen 4.  
5
6
This function gives you enormous control over your machines most powerful features.  
For more information on the Review Commands function, please see page 2.22.  
Set Redial Interval  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
1.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Receiving faxes  
Note: Dont try to answer a call by pressing MONITOR/CALL. The monitor function  
So whats the big deal, anyway?!?  
is only for on-hook dialing. Your fax machine does not have a speakerphone.  
That may be what youre wondering, upon seeing the title above. After all, telling  
you how to send faxes is one thing, but — as long as the fax machine is running and  
has paper installed — why spend time on explaining how to receive faxes?  
Well, you have a point. Still, there are just a few little niceties you may find helpful  
to know. So …  
Different ways to get the job done  
Reception modes  
Your fax machine has two different reception modes — Tel Ready and Fax Ready —  
each of which well explain in a moment — along with giving you an idea of which  
one you should use, depending upon your setup.  
Answering calls manually — for both reception modes  
In either reception mode, you always can answer calls manually if you have an  
optional handset installed. J ust pick it up, as you would if using a normal phone.  
If you hear someone speaking to you, go ahead and  
have a normal phone call.  
If you hear distinctive fax tones (“beep — beep  
— beep — beep), press START and hang up the  
optional handset. Your fax machine will begin  
receiving a fax.  
Note: On an F-150, receiving this way disables  
“V.34” mode so that the machine  
receives the fax in normal ITU-T Group 3  
fashion.  
1.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Tel Ready mode: when Auto Answer is off  
Use it if:  
You intend to use the same line for both fax and phone calls  
and  
• Youre using, on that line, at least one other phone which is not  
connected to your fax machine  
and  
• You have installed an optional handset on your fax machine.  
In th is m od e: Your fax machine never answers calls automatically; you must  
answer each call and handle it as described in Answering calls  
manually — for both reception modes” (this page, left column).  
To select Tel Ready:  
If there isnt a document in the feeder, skip to step 2.  
If theres a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.  
1
Press AUTO ANSWER once or twice until the Auto Answer light is off and the  
LCD shows:  
2
Tel Ready  
Sep 11 1998 20:30  
A quick switcheroo thats easy to do  
To toggle between Tel Ready and Fax Ready (see page 1.19), turn off Auto Answer.  
(To maintain Tel Ready as your default mode, just leave Auto Answer off.)  
1.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting started  
Fax Ready mode  
When the paper runs out  
Use it if:  
You have your fax machine installed on a dedicated” line (one it  
doesnt share with a second phone).  
Getting the word from your machine  
When either the cassette or the multipurpose tray in your fax machine runs out of  
paper, the machine beeps, the REP LACE P AP ER light glows and the LCD indicates  
which source — the cassette or the multipurpose tray — has run out of paper. In  
this example, the cassette is empty:  
In th is m od e: Your fax machine answers each incoming call after a certain num-  
ber of rings (see page 2.5) and attempts fax reception.  
To select Fax Ready:  
If there isnt a document in the feeder, skip to step 2.  
If theres a document in the feeder, press STOP so it will feed out.  
1
Fax Ready  
Check Cassette Paper  
Press AUTO ANSWER once or twice until the light is lit. and the display shows:  
2
Of course, your fax machine cannot print fax messages or copies without paper.  
Fax Ready  
However …  
Jan 15 1998 13:30  
Receiving when out of paper  
If your machine runs out of paper while youre away, it will store in memory up to  
50 separate fax receptions (see the note, below). This is called out-of-paper reception.  
Then, when you replenish the paper supply, the fax machine will print the stored  
messages automatically! This is a great ease to your peace of mind, especially for  
overnight and weekend sessions.  
Note: How many pages (as opposed to receptions) your fax machine can store for  
out-of-paper reception will vary. It depends upon not only your machines  
memory capacity but also the types of documents being sent, and the resolu-  
tion settings at which the documents are sent, to your machine.  
1.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Weve covered  
the musts.”  
Now, lets explore  
the goodies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Whats inside this section  
Getting everything just the way you want it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2  
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8  
Its a great phone, too . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18  
The time machine: delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21  
Basket cases: batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28  
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36  
Keeping things secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
Custom settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56  
2.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Getting everything just the way you want it  
The EasyStart feature guided you through the just-gotta” settings on your machine.  
In the next few pages, well cover other settings.  
To change the setting, press  
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen light contrast.  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your chosen  
4
Contrast:  
Light  
Program/Enter  
Setting up for scans  
You can set parameters regarding how your fax machine scans documents for either  
faxing or copying:  
If your machine is either an F-120 or F-100, skip to step 7.  
If your machine is an F-150, proceed to step 5.  
P r im a r y tr a n sm ission m od e — Gives you four ways to send faxes, either one  
of the three resolution modes — normal, fine or superfine (S Fine” on the LCD)  
— or in grayscale mode (Gray).  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks which scanning width you select:  
5
Scan Width:  
A4  
Program/Enter  
P r im a r y con tr a st m od e — Sets how light or dark you want faxed documents  
to be when they arrive at their destinations.  
For most uses, A4” is the proper setting; it scans the central 8.2of each  
page. However, for documents of unusual width, you may wish to use the B4”  
setting, which scans the central 9.9of each page. (See A4, B4, A3” in the  
Glossary beginning on page 3.17.)  
Sca n n in g w id th (F-150 only) — Set how wide an area your fax machine scans  
per page.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 1, ENTER. The LCD asks which resolution you select:  
J
1
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 7.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.  
Primary: Normal  
Program/Enter  
To change the setting, press  
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen “B4.  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your chosen  
6
7
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Scan Width:  
B4  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your chosen  
2
3
Program/Enter  
mode appears. In this example, weve chosen fine resolution.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Primary: Fine  
Program/Enter  
Of course, you always can change the resolution and contrast before sending. (You  
can change the scanning width only through the previously described procedure.)  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD asks which contrast setting you select:  
To adjust the resolution and contrast:  
Contrast:  
Normal  
Program/Enter  
Press RESOLUTION to change the resolution.  
Press CONTRAST to change the contrast.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 5.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 4.  
2.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Using U4/CODE to enter characters  
Certain settings give you a chance to enter some kind of identifying name. As  
explained earlier (page 1.11), you can do this with the one-touch keys. But you may  
also use the U4/CODE key in combination with other keys to produce a wide variety  
of characters, as well as regular letters and numbers. Heres how to do it:  
Making settings for printing faxes  
You can set three parameters for printing received fax messages:  
Print reduction rate  
Reduction margin  
Half-page reception  
When the machine prompts you to enter a name, press U4/CODE. The display  
will change to:  
1
You set all three in the same operation (see next page), but each deserves its own  
brief explanation.  
Your Name :Code  
_
Print reduction rate  
Print reduction lets you set the machine to reduce a large incoming document to a  
size which will fit on your paper. This setting doesnt affect copies you may make  
with your machine. Fortunately, however, it also has copy reduction (see page 2.4).  
Consult the chart below and find the character you wish to enter.  
2
First keypress  
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
A
Ç
B
É
æ
Æ
ô
ö
ò
û
ù
C
D
á
E
α
F
p
q
θ
ü
Σ
π
x
Here are the options for both print reduction and copy reduction settings:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
!
"
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
β
ε
µ
σ
ρ
ϑ
÷
Settin g  
Au to  
Wh a t it d oes  
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
í
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
a
Automatically reduces printouts at variable rates down to a  
minimum of 70%. Tries to reduce printout to fit on one sheet of  
your selected paper size; if cant, prints the image at 100% size  
on two or more pages.  
`
.
G
H
I
ÿ
\
Φ
o
¿
Ö
Ü
¢
Performs no reduction. (Due to the senders TTI, this may print two  
pages when receiving a one-page fax document. See 97%, below.)  
100%  
97%  
J
j
K
L
M
N
O
Reduces an original so that the final printout of a one-page docu-  
ment (if the original isnt larger than the paper in your machine)  
will be only one page long, despite the TTI.  
C
D
E
F
¥
]
^
_
î
ì
Ä
Å
£
¢
n
¡
-
.
/
÷
P
t
«
»
ƒ
91%  
81%  
Provides slightly more reduction.  
The legends just outside the box indicate which key you press, and in which  
order, to get a given character. For example, to get a backslash (\ ) character,  
youd press C, 8. (The blank areas for 2, 0 and C, 0 indicate where spaces occur.)  
Provides even greater reduction. Helpful for certain international  
stationery sizes, as well as special applications.  
Turns legal-sized originals into letter-sized printed copies.  
75%  
To enter each character, press the indicated keys.  
3
4
Im p or ta n t: Remember that you also can enter numbers through the  
numeric keypad and letters and other non-numeric characters  
through the one-touch keys in combination with the U1/ABC,  
U2/a bc and U3/SYMBOL keys.  
For best results …  
While handy, the reduction feature cant solve every situation. (Also, the  
printout may omit a small bit of the image at the page break if the machine  
tries to reduce a legal-sized page onto letter-sized paper at any setting  
other than 75%.) So, whenever possible, loa d th e cor r ect size of p a p er  
befor e r eceivin g a fa x (or m a k in g a cop y) of th a t size.  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want  
to change just one character in the name, press  
to move the cursor  
leftward, or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then  
re-enter until the name is just as you want it.  
Press ENTER to save the name.  
2.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Reduction margin  
Your fax machines reduction margin is measured in millimeters (mm). Well define  
it by explaining how its used:  
To change the setting, use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin  
4
5
you want. If necessary, press  
or /P ROGRAM to move the cursor if you  
need. In this example, weve chosen 35mm.  
When a fax message enters your machines electronic brain, the machine measures  
the messages length and compares it to (a ) the length of your selected paper p lu s  
(b) the reduction margin you set. If the length of the incoming message is shorter  
than the sum of (a ) and (b), your machine prints the message on just one sheet;  
otherwise, it prints the message on more than one sheet.  
Prnt Reduc Rate:  
91%  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for half-  
page reception:  
Note: An Auto reduction setting and a reduction margin setting of 24mm will  
print most incoming faxes as single pages. Try this combination first and  
then, only if you have problems with it, select different settings.  
Half Page Recpt:  
Off  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 7.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.  
Half-page reception  
Half-page reception is especially handy for saving paper if some of the faxes you  
receive are half-page, memo-sized” messages. When activated, this feature tells the  
machine to combine two of these half-page receptions onto a single sheet. Half-page  
reception combines separate half-page messages sent back-to-back during the same  
transmission. If you have half-page reception turned on, your fax wont hold a  
standalone half-page reception in memory until a second half-page message follows.  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your choice  
6
7
appears. In this example, weve chosen On.  
Half Page Recpt: On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Making the printing settings  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows the currently set print  
reduction rate:  
J
1
Making settings for copying  
Prnt Reduc  
Rate:Auto  
You can set two parameters for copying:  
Copy reduction rate — Works the same way as the print reduction rate (see page  
2.3 for more details).  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Reduction margin — Serves the same purpose as the reduction margin for print-  
ing (see earlier information on this page).  
To change the setting, press  
reduction setting appears. In this example, weve chosen 91%.  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your chosen  
2
3
You set both in the same operation, as with the three printing settings.  
Note: The same options, in terms of both reduction settings and reduction mar-  
gins are available for copy reduction as for print reduction. (If necessary,  
review the preceding discussion, Making settings for printing faxes,” begin-  
ning on page 2.3.) The difference, here, is that you probably are better off  
with a setting of 00 on the reduction margin.  
Prnt Reduc Rate:  
91%  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for the  
reduction margin:  
Prnt Reduc Rate:  
91%  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 5.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 4.  
2.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To change the setting, use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows the current copy reduction rate:  
J
1
2
3
rings, from one to nine. Here, weve chosen four rings.  
Copy Reduc  
Rate:Auto  
Set # Of Rings  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Note: If you enter 0 (zero), the machine will beep brie¾y to warn you that it  
cant accept that setting.  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your chosen  
2
3
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
reduction setting appears. In this example, weve chosen 75%.  
Copy Reduc Rate:  
75%  
Setting ECM  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD shows the current setting for the  
reduction margin:  
Ever hear static on the line during a phone call? Its a real nuisance — but, worse, it  
may ruin your attempts to communicate via fax. This is because line noise” can  
easily disrupt the flow of data from one fax machine to another.  
Copy Reduc Rate:  
75%  
Thats why your fax machine gives you the chance of operating in Error Correction  
Mode (ECM). When two fax machines communicate while running in ECM, the send-  
ing machine automatically checks the data, block” by block,” as it sends. If the  
receiving fax machine cant verify the transmission, the first machine will re-send  
as necessary. (Essentially, the sending machine asks, Did you hear’ that seg-  
ment?and the other machine answers either Yeah; go on” or No; try it again.)  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 5.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 4.  
To change the setting, use the numeric keypad to enter the reduction margin  
4
5
you want. If necessary, press  
or /P ROGRAM to move the cursor if you  
Note: While using ECM gives you a better chance of getting a fax document  
through a troublesome phone line, it also could slow down the transmission  
time — and increasingly so in proportion to how bad the phone line is.  
Thats why we let you turn ECM on or off as you require.  
need. In this example, weve chosen 00mm.  
Copy Reduc Rate:  
75%  
Note: Not all fax machines have ECM. If youve activated ECM and then transmit to  
a fax machine not currently using ECM, there will no change in the fax  
transmission from a usual, non-ECM transmission.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 0, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows the current ECM setting:  
Setting the number of rings  
You can set how many times your fax machine will ring before answering a call.  
You may choose one to nine rings.  
1
ECM Mode:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 0, 6, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
J
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
1
Set # Of Rings  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
2
3
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen Off.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
ECM Mode:  
Off  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
2.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Setting silent mode  
If you and your fax machine share a quiet place, youll really appreciate being able to  
put the machine into silent mode. This mutes both the ringer and the Im done!beep  
your machine makes after sending or receiving a fax or making a copy.  
Setting the transmission confirmation stamp  
You can set your fax machine so that it will automatically place a small stamp mark  
on the front of each original document that it successfully scans.  
Im p or ta n t: Be sure that this feature is turned off if you are sending original docu-  
Note: Lets say it again — silent mode mutes the ringer as well as the beep. So, if  
youre using your fax machine as both a fax and phone (with the optional  
handset), you may not wish to use this feature.  
ments you dont want the fax to stamp.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 2, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows your faxs current setting:  
1
Stamp:  
Off  
Note: Of course, turning on the silent mode on your fax machine wont turn off  
ringers on other telephones in your house or office. Similarly, other phones  
wont distinguish between fax and voice calls.  
Program/Enter  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows your faxs current setting:  
J
1
Silent Mode:  
Off  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
2
3
Program/Enter  
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen On.  
Stamp:  
On  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Program/Enter  
To change the setting, press  
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen On.  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
2
Silent Mode:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Note: Dont be confused. If silent mode is On, the machine will be quiet.  
If silent mode is Off, the machine will ring and beep as usual.  
(In other words, the Off/On refers to the silent mode setting,  
not to the sound itself!)  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
2.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To print the settings list:  
Setting the language  
While English is the language in which your machine initially is set to display mes-  
sages and print reports, you can set it to speak” French or Spanish, too! As you give  
the order for the machine to change languages, it rolls” from English to French to  
Spanish and then back to English.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
I
,
ENTER.  
1
Enter Time  
Press ENTER repeatedly until the LCD shows:  
To make the change from one language to the next, press /P ROGRAM, #.  
2
3
Print Setting List  
Enter/Stop  
¿Qué es? — or, What is it?  
If, after making a language change, youre not sure which language is showing,  
press /P ROGRAM once and decide based on what results on the LCD:  
Press ENTER to print the settings list.  
A Num. Une-Touche  
is French.  
Program./Val.  
Printing a program list  
You also can have your machine print a program list. This list gives a brief summary  
of the various instructions available on your fax machine, organized in a program  
tree” so you can see which key combinations produce which instructions.  
A Núm. Una-Tecla  
is Spanish.  
Program./Sel.  
If the language you see is the one you want, press STOP to return to standby mode.  
Note: Some settings on the list affect only certain operations well explain later.  
Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any set-  
ting you dont recognize or understand.  
If you want to change languages, press STOP to return to standby mode and then  
press /P ROGRAM, # again to go to the next language in the cycle.  
To print a program list, press /P ROGRAM, *, 8. Your machine will print the list.  
Note: If you have certain options installed on your machine, the list will be two  
Printing your settings  
After you have your machine set as you want, have it print a settings list. We rec-  
ommend this particularly if youll be sharing the machine with other users, who  
might change the settings for one reason or another.  
pages in length.  
With this list, you can quickly confirm that all settings are as you want, without  
having to go back and check them on the machine. Or, if you do need to undo some-  
one elses unauthorized (or even authorized) changes, this list guides you in  
returning the machine to your preferred settings.  
Note: Some settings on the list affect only certain operations well explain later.  
Please refer to the index at the end of these instructions to locate any set-  
ting you dont recognize or understand.  
2.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Autodialer  
Your fax machines autodialer is one of its most versatile features. It stores your  
most frequently called phone and fax numbers for instant recall so you dont have to  
remember them. Now, its easy to dial even the most complicated international  
calls!  
As you store the numbers — well get to that shortly — youll see how to enter the  
names so you can use this extremely handy feature.  
Special dialing characters  
Which number do you find easier to read: 919725552009 or 9-1-972-555-2009?  
Obviously, its the second one. The hyphen (or dash) character (-”) separates the  
number into its various parts — in this example, a 9 for outside-line access, a 1 for  
long-distance access, the area code and the phone number.  
Autodialer basics  
How do you autodial?  
There are two kinds of autodialer numbers. The difference between the two is how  
you “call them up,” so to speak:  
Imagine how much more important this can be if you also have to use special long-  
distance access codes, country codes for international calling, etc.  
Also, certain calls require special symbols besides just numerals to get through. If  
you make calls to other countries — or just have your fax machine on an unusual  
phone system — youll want to be able to put the appropriate characters in the  
numbers you store. Otherwise, your autodialer wont be so autoafter all!  
One-touch Pressing one of the keys, marked  
the right side of the control panel.  
A
Z
,
U1U4, a z and U5U8, on  
Speed-dial Pressing SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX followed by a three-digit identifier,  
Thats why your fax machine allows you to enter special dialing characters. Heres a  
brief description of these characters, as well as how you can put them in the num-  
bers you store in the autodialer:  
from 001 to 140.  
How big is the vault?  
How many numbers can your fax store? A total of 200 — up to 60 one-touch num-  
bers and up to 140 speed-dial numbers.  
Ch a r . Wh a t it d oes  
Keystr ok e(s)  
Makes long numbers easier to read.  
Doesnt change fax machine operation.  
DIALING OP TIONS (once)  
DIALING OP TIONS (twice)  
DIALING OP TIONS (3 times)  
/
!
Which number is which?  
Your fax machines autodialer will hold more than just fax numbers: you can store  
Moms phone number along with your warehouses fax number.  
(Has no effect in the United States.)  
How? Because, when you command the autodialer to dial a number, the fax checks  
to see whether theres a document in the feeder. If there is, the machine dials as a  
fax machine (i. e., dials while sending fax tones). If there isnt, it dials as a phone.  
Tells your fax machine to pause until it  
hears” a dial tone.  
Enters a pause. Each pause lasts five  
seconds (or whatever length you set; see  
pages 1.13–1.14). Each pause uses two of  
the characters you can store in one  
phone number.  
EasyDial directory: A preview  
or, What the hecks a Location ID?  
Your machine also features a built-in EasyDial directory (see pages 2.15–2.16). This  
lets you enter your fax/phone numbers along with descriptive names. (Your  
machine calls this name a Location ID.) The autodialer sorts these listings alphabet-  
ically so, with EasyDial, you can look them up by name as if you were using a phone  
book!  
REDIAL/P AUSE [after entry of  
at least one other character]  
–/  
–!  
If your fax machine is on a pulse (not  
tone-dialing) line, switches from pulse-  
dialing to tone (DTMF”)-dialing. Use after  
the actual phone number but before any  
DIALING OP TIONS (once), then  
/P ROGRAM (once), then  
2.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for  
DIALING OP TIONS (3 times),  
then /P ROGRAM (once)  
characters (such as a long-distance  
carriers access code) which must be in  
DTMF tone. Do not use on a tone line.  
4
5
this one-touch number, the LCD now shows either:  
B :Fax Number  
_
B :Fax Number  
9-1-555-987-6543_  
or  
Considering call groups  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system may require. (You  
may want to review Special dialing characters,” page 2.8.) The number can  
be up to 40 characters in length:  
As well explain more fully later, your fax machine can broadcast — send the same fax  
to numerous remote machines (see Broadcasting,” page 2.18). As you train” your  
autodialer, you may wish to set up call groups. These are sets of phone numbers,  
arranged as you see fit, which make broadcasting simpler. For example, you may  
wish to have one call group consisting of all your clients in a particular city, another  
group with all of your field sales team members, another with all your vendors and  
still another with the various financial institutions with which you do business.  
Also, one number can belong to as many as 32 groups.  
B :Fax Number  
9-1-5559292039_  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
to  
Your fax machine can store as many as 200 numbers in up to 32 different call  
groups. In the following explanations of how to store autodialer numbers, youll see  
that its easy to assign those numbers to call groups, for your maximum conve-  
nience! Also, you can easily print a directory of your call groups (see page 2.15).  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
just one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
Using one-touch numbers  
When the number is as you want it, press ENTER to store it.  
As indicated previously, your fax machine will store up to 60 one-touch numbers by  
6
7
using the keys marked  
A
Z
and U1U4 (fliptab a ) and a z and U5U8 (fliptab b).  
The LCD now displays either:  
Entering or changing a one-touch number  
B :Alt. No.  
_
B :Alt. No.  
9-1-555-987-6553_  
or  
Im p or ta n t: To erase a number, see Erasing a one-touch number” (page 2.11).  
Press /P ROGRAM, A, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a  
number entered for one-touch number A, the LCD shows:  
You may now enter (or change) an alternate number, just as you entered the  
regular number. This number, too, can be up to 40 characters long. During a  
transmission or polling operation (see pages 2.31–2.33), your fax machine will  
try to reach this alternate number only after failing with all redials (see  
pages 1.16–1.17) to the regular number. If all tries to the alternate number  
also fail, the fax will sound a beeping alarm tone.  
1
Select One-Touch  
A :No Number Stored  
Select One-Touch  
A :9-1-555-345-6789  
or  
If  
A
is the key you want to set, skip to step 3. (However, our sample displays  
If you do not wish to enter or change an alternate number, skip to step 8.  
If you do wish to enter or change an alternate number, do so by using the  
numeric keypad the same way you did in step 5.  
from here on will say Brather than A.”)  
Press the one-touch key in which you want to store a number or change a pre-  
viously stored number. Here, weve selected  
2
3
B
and the LCD shows either:  
Press ENTER.  
8
9
Select One-Touch  
B :No Number Stored  
Select One-Touch  
B :9-1-555-987-6543  
or  
The LCD now displays:  
B :Name :Upper  
_
B :Name :Upper  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different one-touch key, just  
press that key before going on step 4.  
or  
2.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
The machine now is prompting you for a name — a Location ID, remember? —  
You may now designate up to 32 call groups to which this number will belong.  
(If necessary, review Considering call groups,” page 2.9.)  
so youll be able to find it easily in the EasyDial directory (see pages 2.15–2.16).  
If you do not wish to enter or change this numbers Location ID, skip to step 11.  
If you do wish to enter or change this numbers Location ID, proceed to step  
If you do not wish to change this numbers call group status, skip to step 14.  
If you do wish to change this numbers call group status, proceed to step 13.  
10.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups to which this number will  
belong. There are 32 possible call groups, numbered 132. (If youre changing  
a previous call group entry, see the note at the end of this step.)  
13  
A numbers Location ID may be up to 16 characters in length. You enter the  
Location ID the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. Well  
review the process, here. (If youre changing a previously entered Location ID,  
see the note at the end of this step.)  
10  
This shows the entry of 3 to assign this one-touch number to Call Group 3:  
B :Group No.  
3_  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, you enter letters and other non-numeric char-  
acters through the one-touch keys.  
Note: You d o n ot have to insert a leading zero.  
B :Name :Upper  
_
Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).  
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a  
comma after each number (except the last one, of course) by pressing  
GROUP DIAL. For example, if you enter 3, GROUP DIAL, 1, 6, GROUP DIAL, 2, 7  
to assign this one-touch number to Call Groups 3, 16 and 27, the LCD will  
show:  
The word Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only  
upper-case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
To change it so that pressing a one-touch key will produce a lower-case letter  
rather than an upper-case letter, press U2/a bc. The display will change to:  
B :Name :Lower  
_
B :Group No.  
3,16,27_  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previous  
setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, to change just one charac-  
ter in the setting, press  
to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter the setting.  
to move the cursor leftward, or  
/P ROGRAM  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press U1/ABC.  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, press U3/SYMBOL. This lets you  
enter the blue characters shown on the one-touch keypad.  
Press ENTER.  
The LCD will display the next one-touch number.  
If you do not wish to enter any more one-touch numbers, press STOP to finish.  
If you do not wish to enter the currently displayed one-touch number but do  
want to enter another one-touch number, go back to step 2.  
14  
To use the CODE function at U4/CODE to enter a wide variety of characters,  
please review the explanation on page 2.3. The vast majority of the time, you  
will probably find the ABC, a bc and SYMBOL keys to be sufficient.  
If you do wish to enter this one-touch number, go back to step 4.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
just one character in the name, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
One-touch fax dialing  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the name is just as you want it.  
Now that youve stored a one-touch number or two, lets discuss the ease of using  
one-touch keys to make calls. Youll probably use one-touch numbers to dial fax, not  
voice, calls most of the time. Well show you a bit later (page 2.11) how to dial a one-  
touch voice call; but, first, heres how to dial a fax call using a one-touch number:  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
11  
12  
The LCD now displays:  
Insert the document.  
1
2
B :Group No.  
_
B :Group No.  
2,6_  
or  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
2.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
The machine will handle the call from here, although the exact sequence of events  
will vary depending upon whether you specified transmission from memory or  
transmission from the feeder:  
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by  
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
3
4
Press the one-touch key in which youve stored the number.  
If you specified transmission from memory:  
Your fax machine scans your document into memory first, then dials the other  
fax machine.  
The LCD shows the Location ID and the documents width and resolution settings:  
Katz’s Cat Care  
A4  
Normal  
Note: If the number doesnt have a Location ID, the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly  
from memory. (To review memory transmission, see pages 1.14–1.15.)  
If you specified transmission from the feeder:  
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.  
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-  
ner, transmitting as it goes.  
The LCD shows the Location ID and the documents width and resolution settings:  
Katz’s Cat Care  
A4  
Normal  
Note: If the number doesnt have a Location ID, the number appears.  
One-touch phone dialing  
To dial a phone call using a one-touch number, you must have an optional handset  
attached to your machine. (Contact your authorized Muratec dealer for more infor-  
mation on this optional item.)  
Heres how to make the call:  
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:  
1
Lifting the handset  
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker.  
2.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Press the one-touch key in which youve stored the number. As the machine  
Printing a list of your one-touch numbers  
Whoops! Forgot which number is in” which one-touch key? Dont worry: just print a  
list of your one-touch numbers. The list includes each keys letter, the Location ID (if  
any), number and group number[s] (if any) youve stored in the key.  
2
dials, it will show the number on the LCD:  
** Tel Mode **  
9-555-2842_  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, A, 3, ENTER.  
Note: Remember that your fax machines monitor speaker is not a speakerphone;  
so, if you dialed by using the monitor speaker, be sure to pick up the hand-  
set and speak to the other person when he/she answers!  
Using speed-dial numbers  
Note: You also can use this method to dial a fax call when, for some reason, you  
want to hear the other faxs answering fax tones. (Make sure theres a docu-  
ment in the feeder.) When you do hear those tones, press START to send the  
document in the feeder; if youd lifted the handset, hang it up at this point.  
As we mentioned before, your fax machine will store up to 140 speed-dial numbers,  
designated by three-digit identifier codes from 001 (the first number) through 140.  
Im p or ta n t: When entering the identifier code for a speed-dial number, you must  
enter leading zeroes, if necessary, to make three digits (e. g., 001 or 027).  
Of course, speed-dial numbers 100–140 dont require leading zeroes.  
Erasing a one-touch number  
Press /P ROGRAM, A, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Entering or changing a speed-dial number  
1
Select One-Touch  
A :No Number Stored  
Select One-Touch  
A :9-1-555-345-6789  
Im p or ta n t: To erase a number, see Erasing a speed-dial number” (pages 2.14–2.15).  
or  
Press /P ROGRAM, B, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a  
number entered for speed-dial number 001, the LCD shows:  
1
If  
A
is the key you want to erase, skip to step 3. (However, our examples from  
here will say Brather than A.”)  
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
or  
Press the key for the one-touch number you want to erase. Here, weve  
2
selected  
B:  
If 001 is the speed-dial number you want to set, skip to step 3. (However, our  
examples from here will say 005” rather than 001.)  
Select One-Touch  
B :9-1-555-987-6543  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired speed-dial numbers three-digit  
identifier code. Here, weve entered 005 and the LCD shows either:  
2
If you change your mind and wish to erase the number stored in a different  
one-touch key, just press that key before going on step 4.  
3
4
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
or  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Erase One-Touch  
Check Program/Enter  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different speed-dial number, just  
repeat step 2 until the desired number appears, then go on to step 4.  
3
4
Press ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a number entered for  
this speed-dial number, the LCD now shows either:  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the one-touch number  
youve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
005:Fax Number  
_
005:Fax Number  
9-555-397-0123_  
Press ENTER to erase the number.  
or  
5
Erase One-Touch  
** Complete **  
To erase another one-touch number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to  
standby mode.  
2.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
A numbers Location ID may be up to 16 characters in length. You enter the  
Location ID the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. Well  
review the process, here. (If youre changing a previously entered Location ID,  
see the note at the end of this step.)  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the speed-dial number exactly as your  
machine should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system  
may require. (You may want to review Special dialing characters,” page 2.8.)  
The number can be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
10  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, you enter letters and other non-numeric char-  
005:Fax Number  
9-1-555-567-1234_  
acters through using the one-touch keys.  
005:Name :Upper  
_
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
to  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
The word Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
upper-case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
just one character in the number, press  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
To change it so that pressing a one-touch key will produce a lower-case letter  
rather than an upper-case letter, press U2/a bc. The display will change to:  
to move the cursor leftward,  
until the number is just as you want it.  
005:Name :Lower  
_
When the number is as you want it, press ENTER to store it.  
6
7
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
The LCD now displays either:  
005:Alt. No.  
_
005:Alt. No.  
9-1-555-789-3556_  
or  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press U1/ABC.  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, press U3/SYMBOL. This lets you  
You may now enter (or change) an alternate number, just as you entered the  
regular number. This number, too, can be up to 40 characters long. During a  
transmission or polling operation (see pages 2.31–2.33), your fax machine will  
try to reach this alternate number only after failing with all redials (see  
pages 1.16–1.17) to the regular number. If all tries to the alternate number  
also fail, the fax will sound a beeping alarm tone.  
enter the blue characters shown on the one-touch keypad.  
To use the CODE function at U4/CODE to enter a wide variety of characters,  
please review the explanation on page 2.3. The vast majority of the time, you  
will probably find the ABC, a bc and SYMBOL keys to be sufficient.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
If you do not wish to enter or change an alternate number, skip to step 8.  
If you do wish to enter or change an alternate number, do so by using the  
numeric keypad the same way you did in step 5.  
just one character in the name, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the name is just as you want it.  
Press ENTER.  
Press ENTER to save the setting and continue.  
8
9
11  
The LCD now displays:  
005:Name :Upper  
_
005:Name :Upper  
West Coast Sales_  
or  
The machine now is prompting you for a name — a Location ID, remember? —  
so youll be able to find it easily in the EasyDial directory (see pages 2.15–2.16).  
If you do not wish to enter or change this numbers Location ID, skip to step 11.  
If you do wish to enter or change this numbers Location ID, proceed to step  
10.  
2.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
The LCD now displays:  
Fax dialing via speed-dial  
To dial a fax call using a speed-dial number:  
12  
005:Group No.  
_
005:Group No.  
1,4,12_  
or  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
You may now designate up to 32 call groups to which this number will belong.  
(If necessary, review Considering call groups,” page 2.9.)  
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by  
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
If you do not wish to change this numbers call group status, skip to step 14.  
If you do wish to change this numbers call group status, proceed to step 13.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the call groups to which this number will  
belong. There are 32 possible call groups, numbered 132. (If youre changing  
a previous call group entry, see the note at the end of this step.)  
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD will show:  
13  
4
Enter Speed Dial  
No.  
This shows the entry of 6 to assign this speed-dial number to Call Group 6:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this  
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD will show:  
005:Group No.  
6_  
5
Press Start  
S018_  
Note: You d o n ot have to insert a leading zero for the call group number.  
Note: To assign this number to all 32 call groups, enter 0 (zero).  
Press START.  
6
If you want to assign the number to more than one call group, insert a comma  
after each number (except the last one, of course) by pressing GROUP DIAL.  
This shows the entry of 6, GROUP DIAL, 1,7, GROUP DIAL, 3, 0 to assign this  
speed-dial number to Call Groups 6, 17 and 30:  
The machine will handle the call from here. The sequence will vary depending upon  
whether you specified transmission from memory or transmission from the feeder:  
If you specified transmission from memory:  
005:Group No.  
6,17,30_  
Your fax scans your document into memory first, then dials the other machine.  
The LCD shows the Location ID and the documents width and resolution settings:  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
Shipping &  
Receiving  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
just one character in the setting, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the setting is just as you want it.  
Note: If the speed-dial number doesnt have a Location ID, the number appears.  
When the other machine answers, your fax will transmit the document directly  
from memory. (To review memory transmission, see pages 1.14–1.15.)  
Press ENTER.  
The LCD will display the next speed-dial number.  
If you do not wish to enter any more speed-dial numbers, press STOP to finish.  
If you do not wish to enter the currently displayed speed-dial number but do  
want to enter another speed-dial number, go back to step 2.  
14  
If you specified transmission from the feeder:  
Your fax machine dials the other fax machine.  
When the other machine answers, your fax feeds the document through its scan-  
ner, transmitting as it goes.  
If you do wish to enter this speed-dial number, go back to step 4.  
The LCD shows the Location ID and the documents width and resolution settings:  
Shipping &  
Receiving  
Note: If the speed-dial number doesnt have a Location ID, the number appears.  
2.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Phoning via speed-dial  
To dial a phone call using a speed-dial number, you must have an optional handset  
attached to your machine. Heres how to make the call:  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
4
5
Erase Speed-Dial  
Check Program/Enter  
Obtain a dial tone by doing one of the following:  
1
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the speed-dial number  
Lifting the handset  
youve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
Press MONITOR/CALL to use the monitor speaker  
Press ENTER to erase the number.  
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX. The LCD will show:  
2
3
Erase Speed-Dial  
** Complete **  
** Tel Mode **  
S_  
To erase another speed-dial number, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to return to  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier (such as 018, in this  
example) for the speed-dial number you want to dial. The LCD will show:  
standby mode.  
Printing a list of your speed-dial numbers  
You can easily print a list of your speed-dial numbers. The list includes each numbers  
three-digit identifier, the Location ID (if any), number and any group number[s]  
youve stored in the number.  
Press Start  
9-555-5783_  
Note: Remember that your fax machines monitor speaker is not a speakerphone;  
so, if you dialed by using the monitor speaker, be sure to pick up the hand-  
set and speak to the other person when he/she answers!  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, B, 3, ENTER.  
Note: You also can use this method to dial a fax call when, for some reason, you  
want to hear the other fax machines answering fax tones. (Make sure  
theres a document in the feeder.) When you do hear those tones over either  
your handset or the monitor speaker, press START to send the document in  
the feeder; if youre using your handset, hang it up at this point.  
Printing a call group directory  
Another convenient feature your fax machine offers is the ability to print a call group  
directory. (If necessary, review Considering call groups,” page 2.9.) This lists all your  
stored autodialer numbers by Location ID and indicates to which of the 32 possible call  
groups each belongs.  
Erasing a speed-dial number  
The directory divides the call groups into four banks, 00–09, 10–19, 20–29 and 30–32.  
(00 means a number is in all call groups.) For example, the directory might show:  
Press /P ROGRAM, B, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
or  
No.  
Location  
00  
2 4  
10  
20  
30  
2
001 And Sew It G  
002 KC Enterpris  
003 Katz Cat Car  
7 0  
0 4  
1
0
If 001 is the speed-dial number you want to erase, skip to step 3. (However,  
our examples from here will say 005” rather than 001.)  
A
B
C
Carson Co.,I  
Tex. Ofc. of 1  
e.e.gummings  
4
Use the numeric keypad to enter the three-digit identifier for the speed-dial  
number you want to erase. Here, weve selected 005:  
2
3
2
Enter Speed-Dial  
No.  
In this list, speed-dial number 001 is in call groups 2 and 4; speed-dial number 002  
is in groups 7, 10 and 21; speed-dial number 003 is in groups 20 and 32; one-touch  
number A is in groups 4, 10 and 14; one-touch number B is in group 1; and one-  
touch number C is in group 2.  
If you change your mind and wish to erase a different speed-dial number, just  
go back to step 2 and perform it before going on step 4.  
To print a call group directory, press /P ROGRAM,  
H
,
ENTER.  
2.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
EasyDial directory dialing  
When the LCD is showing the name you want to dial, press START.  
6
If there is a document in the feeder, your machine will dial a fax call to the  
selected autodialer number.  
The EasyDial directory dialing feature makes your autodialer even more like an  
electronic phone book. EasyDial sorts and displays numbers alphabetically accord-  
ing to their Location IDs, so you can easily find them and dial them. When the name  
you want appears, you just press START to begin a call (either phone or fax). Your  
machines EasyDial directory alphabetizes in the following order: upper-case let-  
ters; lower-case letters; and, finally, symbols and numbers.  
If there isnt a document in the feeder, your machine will activate the mon-  
itor speaker and dial a regular phone call. (Remember that, to make a  
regular phone call from your machine, you must have attached an optional  
handset.) At this point, you may either:  
— Lift the handset now  
If you want to use EasyDial to make a regular phone call, make sure theres  
no document in the feeder and then skip to step 4.  
If you want to use EasyDial to send a fax, insert the document.  
1
or  
— Listen to the monitor speaker until you hear the other person answer,  
and then lift the handset.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
2
3
What if an EasyDial call doesnt go through?  
If an EasyDial call fails (for example, because of a busy signal), what happens next  
depends upon the kind of call it was.  
If you want to toggle between transmission from memory and transmission  
from the feeder, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX twice. The LCD shows the alphabetically first listing  
in your fax machines EasyDial directory:  
4
If it was a fax call …  
Your fax machine automatically redials the number after the redial interval (see  
page 1.17). It keeps trying until either of the following occurs first:  
Telephone Index  
[A]  
It successfully reaches the other number (and, if its a fax call, makes contact  
with the machine on the other end).  
Note: Here, the [A]indicates this listing begins with a character in the  
upper-case letters set. If it began with a lower-case letter, this would  
instead be an [a]; if it began with a symbol, this would instead be  
It has automatically redialed the number the last try (see page 1.16).  
If it was a regular phone call …  
[!]; or, if it began with a number, this would instead be a [0]  
.
… Youll have to redial manually:  
(If this listing is the one you want to dial, skip to step 6.)  
Obtain a dial tone by eith er lifting the handset or pressing MONITOR/CALL.  
Scroll through the listings to find the one you want. You do this by pressing  
certain keys on the numeric keypad:  
1
2
5
Press REDIAL/P AUSE.  
2 or 8 to select the character set — upper-case, lower-case, symbol or num-  
ber — for the first character of the Location ID.  
4 or 6 to check different listings within that character set.  
Note: The scrolling is open-ended.” For example, when you run out of list-  
ings beginning with upper-case letters, pressing 4 or 6 automatically  
moves you into listings beginning with other characters.  
2.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Its a great phone, too  
As youve probably guessed by now, your fax machine is a dandy phone, too! Lets see  
just how dandy by looking briefly at the machines telephone features.  
Dial the number you want. You may use either the numeric keypad, a one-  
touch key or a speed-dial number.  
2
Im p or ta n t: All of the instructions on this page assume you have attached an  
Note: Remember, your fax machines monitor speaker is not a speakerphone; so,  
optional handset to your fax machine.  
be sure to pick up the handset if the other person answers!  
Note: You also can dial a fax call this way if, for some reason, you want to hear  
the other machines answering fax tones. (Make sure theres a document in  
the feeder.) When you do hear those tones, press START to send the docu-  
ment.  
Redial  
Press REDIAL/P AUSE to — you guessed it! — redial the last number you dialed. (Be  
sure that attempt, too, was also a regular phone call. In a multi-user setting, some-  
one else may have quickly sent a fax without your knowing it.)  
You can EasyDial regular phone calls, too  
J ust in case you didnt notice, the EasyDial directory dialing feature is available for  
regular phone calls as well as fax calls. Review the EasyDial instructions on pages  
2.15–2.16 for more information.  
Hold  
You can put a call on hold during a conversation by pressing HOLD. The LCD will show:  
** On Hold **  
At this point, you can either hang up the handset or leave it off the hook. To return  
to your conversation:  
If you hung up the handset, pick it up.  
If you didnt hang up the handset, press HOLD again.  
On-hook dialing  
Because your machine has a monitor speaker, you can dial without picking up the  
handset. For hands-free dialing:  
Press MONITOR/CALL. Youll hear a dial tone (unless you have set your speaker  
volume to Off; see page 1.8–1.9), and the LCD will show:  
1
** Tel Mode **  
_
2.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Broadcasting  
The basics of broadcasting  
Delayed broadcasting  
The fastest way to fax one document to multiple recipients is broadcasting and  
your fax machine has very powerful broadcasting capabilities. You ca n u se br oa d -  
ca stin g fr om a n y fu n ction r equ ir in g th e en tr y of a fa x n u m ber ! That means  
you can perform delayed broadcasting (see pages 2.21–2.23), SecureMail broadcast-  
ing (see pages 2.46–2.49) and even broadcasting to hub” units for relay broadcast  
initiation (see pages 2.19–2.20).  
What if you want the broadcast to happen later? Thats the purpose of setting up a  
delayed broadcast.  
Note: Actually, were jumping the gun a bit here; the main discussion of delayed  
commands comes up in The time machine: delayed transmission” (pages  
2.21–2.23). You may wish to read that material before proceeding.  
[Same as steps 1–4 of The basics of broadcasting” (left column).]  
In an ordinary broadcast, you send as you normally would, except for one simple  
change: you just add more fax numbers! You can enter up to 220 numbers (20 nor-  
mally dialed numbers, plus one call group with all 200 autodialer numbers).  
1
2
3
Press COMMUNICATION OP TION, ENTER.  
Well assume youve become familiar with regular fax transmission, and shorten the  
instructions a bit so you can more readily see the differences.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time when you  
want the fax to perform the broadcast. Here, weve set it to occur at 10:15 PM  
on the 30th.  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as usual.  
1
2
3
Delayed  
Press BROADCAST.  
Enter the first fax number — a one-touch number, a speed-dial number, a call  
group or just a regular number dialed from the numeric keypad as usual.  
When finished, press ENTER to save the setting.  
Now, press START. Your machine will return to its normal standby mode,  
while showing this on the LCD:  
4
To add each successive fax number, press BROADCAST between each one to  
insert a comma (GROUP DIAL inserts its own comma), then enter the number as in  
step 3. You can specify up to 220 locations by entering up to 20 numbers or call  
groups (see first paragraph, above) for a broadcast.  
4
** Reserved **  
This means your fax machine is reserved” for the delayed broadcast you  
just programmed.  
If you have set the machine for transmission from memory (see pages  
1.14–1.15), it will scan the document into memory, after which you can use  
the machine normally.  
If you have set the machine for transmission from the feeder (i. e., non-memory  
transmission), the machine can receive faxes but cant transmit until after the  
delayed broadcast occurs.  
Press Start  
C,9-5551204,S118,J  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.  
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, just press CANCEL to clear them  
before proceeding.  
Press START. Your fax machine will scan the document into memory and then  
send it to each number or call group youve entered.  
5
The main idea is: when its time within an operation for entering the fax number to  
which youre to send your document, you enter multiple numbers until youve either  
reached 20 numbers or finished dialing all you want to dial for this document.  
2.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Setting it up, or initiating the initiation  
For you to perform relay broadcast initiation, three things must be true:  
Relay broadcasting and relay broadcast initiation  
Relay broadcasting is a powerful function that takes advantage of a remote Muratec  
The remote fax machine must be a Muratec fax machine with hub” capability.  
hub” fax machines memory to reduce your total communication costs.  
Note: If youre not sure whether the unit to which you want to transmit is a  
true hub” unit, please consult your authorized Muratec dealer or call  
the Muratec Customer Support Center at (972) 364-3350.  
A “hub” fax machine is one to which you send a document, so the hub” can relay it to  
other machines which you dont actually call. The hub” performs a relay broadcast,  
and the machine which sends the original document to the hub” has performed a  
relay broadcast initiation. Your fax machine can perform either operation; in other  
words, your machine can either send to a “hub” unit or be a “hub” unit.  
The call group(s) must exist on the remote fax machine.  
You must know each call groups two-digit identifier number.  
To set up a relay broadcast initiation:  
How it works  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as usual.  
Lets say youre in Los Angeles and need to fax the same document to four locations  
in the Chicago area. You could send four normal fax transmissions, but that would  
be four long-distance calls. However, with relay broadcast initiation, you send the  
document once to your Chicago offices “hub” fax, which then sends it on to each of  
the four locations.  
1
2
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD  
will show:  
Relay Tx  
Group No.  
_
Relay transmission from Hub” to destinations at lower rates  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier of each applicable call  
group in the remote hub” fax machine youll be calling. You may specify up to  
10 groups for each relay broadcast initiation. Do n ot pr ess START.  
To add each group after the first one, press GROUP DIAL to add a comma.  
Below, weve entered 2, GROUP DIAL, 4.  
3
Final destination 1  
Chicago  
Final destination 3  
Relay Tx  
Group No.  
Hub”  
Final destination 2  
2,4_  
Final destination 4  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last group number.  
Los  
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, just press CANCEL to clear them  
Angeles  
before proceeding.  
Original sender  
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
4
Enter Fax Number  
_
Enter the fax number for the remote hub” unit. You may either press a one-  
touch key, enter a speed-dial number or just use the numeric keypad as  
usual. Do n ot pr ess START.  
5
6
Now, lets be a little more specific about what happens when you perform relay  
broadcast initiation:  
You use your fax machine to send a document to at least one call group in a  
remote hub” machines autodialer. This can occur either immediately or as a  
delayed command (see pages 2.21–2.23).  
What you do now depends upon when you wish to begin initiating the  
relay broadcast.  
If you want it to begin now, skip to step 8.  
The remote hub” unit receives your document and stores it in memory.  
If you want to delay it, press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER.  
The remote machine retransmits — relays the document to each fax number  
Note: For more information on delayed transmission, see pages 2.21–2.23.  
in each call group you specified. This is the relay broadcast you initiated.  
2.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and time when you  
want to begin initiating the relay broadcast.  
7
Delayed  
When the entry is complete, press ENTER.  
Press START.  
8
If, in step 6, you chose an immediate relay broadcast initiation, your fax machine  
will begin dialing the remote hub” machine. However, if you requested a delayed  
command, the machine will display Reserved” on the LCDs top line; this means the  
command is in memory.  
Broadcast news; or, making changes  
If you need to make changes in a broadcast after setting it to proceed, youll need to  
make use of REVIEW COMMANDS. See Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,”  
page 2.22.  
2.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
The time machine: delayed transmission  
Take advantage of lower evening and weekend long-distance rates with delayed  
transmission. Your fax machine can store up to 99 delayed transmission commands,  
each of which you can program up to 31 days in advance.  
When the date and time entry is as you wish, press ENTER to save the delayed  
transmission. The LCD shows:  
5
6
Enter Fax Number  
_
Im p or ta n t: If you program a full 99 delayed transmission commands, no further  
memory transmission is possible until the machine performs at least  
one of the delayed commands. (To review memory transmission, see  
pages 1.14–1.15.) However, you always can transmit from the feeder by  
using on-hook dialing or an optional handset (see page 1.16).  
Enter the fax number to which the delayed transmission should go. You may  
either press a one-touch key, enter a speed-dial number or just use the  
numeric keypad normally.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
Setting up a delayed transmission  
just one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
Im p or ta n t: Your machine remembers only the day of the month, not the month  
itself, when its supposed to perform a delayed transmission. So if,  
say, you want your fax to do something at 5:05 PM on J u n e 26, dont  
make that setting sooner than 5:06 PM on Ma y 26.  
Press START. Your machine will return to its normal standby mode, while  
showing this on the LCD:  
7
To set up a delayed transmission:  
** Reserved **  
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as usual.  
1
2
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS. The LCD will show:  
This means your fax machine is reserved” for the delayed transmission com-  
mand you just programmed.  
If you had set the machine for transmission from memory, it will scan the  
document into memory, after which you can use the machine normally.  
If you had set the machine for transmission from the feeder, the machine can  
receive faxes but cant transmit.  
1.Delayed  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the current day of the month, followed by the  
current time (in 24-hour format, as youll recall):  
3
Delayed  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day of the month and the time when you  
want the fax to perform the delayed transmission.  
4
Note: To move the cursor to a specific digit, press  
to move the cursor left-  
ward, or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that digit.  
Here, weve set the transmission to occur on the 11th at 11:05 PM:  
Delayed  
2.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Reviewing or cancelling delayed commands  
If youve stored a delayed command in your fax machine, it will hold it in memory  
until it either completes the command successfully or reaches its maximum number  
of redial attempts (see pages 1.16–1.17). Your machine can store up to 99 delayed  
commands. It identifies each by a two-digit command number ranging from 00 to 98.  
To keep this command (i. e., to abort cancellation) but continue reviewing  
stored commands, press /P ROGRAM.  
To keep this command and stop reviewing commands, press STOP to return  
your machine to standby mode.  
To go ahead with cancelling the command, press CANCEL again and return to  
step 2 to view other commands.  
4
The same procedure lets you both display your machines stored commands and  
have a chance to cancel them, if necessary:  
Note: See also Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast,” below.  
You can toggle between cancelling the command and turning off/on the confirma-  
tion report feature by pressing REVIEW COMMANDS.  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
1
If you r m a ch in e is cu r r en tly h old in g n o d ela yed com m a n d s — It  
will beep briefly and display No Command” on the LCD. To return to  
standby mode, press STOP . To toggle the confirmation report feature for  
only the next fax transmission, press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
Reviewing or cancelling parts of a broadcast  
You also can review or cancel certain numbers within a broadcast:  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS.  
But if there are commands in your machines memory, the LCD will show:  
1
Note: If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it will  
appear on the display.  
C00:9-5552311  
To cancel this command, skip to step 3.  
To review a different command, proceed to step 2.  
Here, you see command 00, followed by the phone number its to dial. If the  
command is to perform a broadcast, Broadcast” will appear instead of the  
phone number. (See Broadcasting,” pages 2.18–2.20.)  
If necessary, press /P R OGR AM repeatedly to scroll through currently  
stored commands.  
2
Note: You may stop this operation any time you wish; just press STOP  
.
If the command is to perform a batch transmission, the LCD will show its  
batch box number (such as B01) rather than the command number. (See  
Basket cases: batch transmission,” pages 2.24–2.27.)  
If you want to cancel the currently shown command, press CANCEL, CANCEL.  
If you want to review individual numbers within this broadcast, go on to  
step 4 without pressing CANCEL.  
3
4
If the command is to perform a continuous polling operation, the LCD will  
show its continuous polling operation number (such as P00) rather than the  
command number. (See Polling,” on pages 2.31–2.33 within the Special fea-  
tures” chapter.)  
To review individual numbers within this broadcast, press BROADCAST to see  
the first number. The LCD will show:  
9-5550388  
Note: If your machine is attempting to perform a command now, it will  
appear on the display.  
To cancel this command, skip to step 3.  
To review a different command, proceed to step 2.  
If this is the number you want to cancel, skip to step 6.  
If it is not, proceed to step 5.  
If necessary, press /P R OGR AM repeatedly to scroll through currently  
stored commands.  
2
3
Press /P R OGR AM to move on to the next number, and keep doing so until  
you find a number you do wish to cancel; then proceed to step 6.  
5
6
Note: You may stop this operation any time you wish; just press STOP  
.
Press CANCEL, CANCEL. The next number will appear.  
If you wish to cancel this number, as well, repeat this step.  
If you wish to cancel a different number, go back to step 5.  
If you want to cancel the currently shown command, press CANCEL. The LCD  
will show:  
C00:9-5552311  
2.22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Printing a delayed command list  
Cant remember some details about a delayed transmission command you set up?  
Or, lets say, someone else in your office is the one who set it up, but now he or she  
has left for the night and you have no idea why the machine is reserved” and how  
long itll stay that way!  
Fortunately, your machine can print a command list which tells you:  
The commands identification number  
The phone number, or remote location”  
The start time (which appears in the same DD,HH:MM format you saw in the pre-  
vious instructions for actually setting up a delayed transmission command)  
A “note” telling if the command is a polling or relay broadcast initiation operation  
(see pages 2.31–2.33 for more on the former and 2.19–2.20 for more on the latter)  
Any selected call groups, SecureMail boxes or database files  
To print a delayed command list, press /P ROGRAM, , 1, ENTER.  
F
Printing a stored document  
Your fax machine can produce a printout of each document stored for delayed trans-  
mission. Youll need to know the documents command number, which you can  
confirm by either reviewing the commands (see page 2.22) or printing a delayed  
command list (see above).  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
F
1
Print Stored Doc.  
Command No.: _  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the commands identification number, 00–98.  
For example, we could enter the following for the very first command, 00:  
2
Print Stored Doc.  
Command No.: 00_  
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will print a copy of the stored document.  
3
2.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Basket cases: batch transmission  
Broadcasting (see pages 2.18–2.20) gets the same document to multiple locations,  
but what about the reverse? Wouldnt it be nice if you could just stack several docu-  
ments into an electronic basket” and then fling the entire contents of that basket  
via fax to one location? Well, you can: its called batch transmission.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax number exactly as your machine  
should dial it, including whatever access codes your phone system may  
require. (You may want to review Special dialing characters,” page 2.8.) The  
number can be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
If there are several documents you want to transmit to the same location, you can  
store up to 40 documents (not pages) into your machines electronic batch boxes. The  
machine can use up to five of these batch boxes, in which you designate in advance  
when the transmission is to occur and to what remote number it should go. When  
that date and time arrives, your machine will transmit each document in the batch  
box to the remote fax machine.  
3:Fax Number  
9-1-555-871-9052_  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
to  
Note: To erase previously entered characters, press CANCEL to erase leftward.  
Or, to change just one character in the number, press to move the  
Creating or modifying a batch box  
The first step to using the batch transmission feature is to create batch boxes in  
your fax machine. This procedure also lets you modify existing batch boxes.  
cursor leftward, or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character.  
Then re-enter until the number is just as you want it.  
When the fax number is as you want it, press ENTER. The LCD now displays:  
6
7
Im p or ta n t: To erase a batch box, see page 2.25.  
To create or modify a batch box:  
3:Transmit Time  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 1, ENTER. Depending on whether you already have a  
number entered for batch box 1, the LCD shows:  
1
Instruct your fax to send from this batch box in one of the following ways:  
Select Batch Box  
1:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
1:9-1-555-345-6789  
Op tion 1:  
Op tion 2:  
Once at a certain time on a certain day of the month (e. g., Do  
this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.) — Use the numeric keypad to enter  
the date and time when the fax should perform the command:  
or  
If this is the batch box you want to set, skip to step 3. (However, our sample  
displays from here on will refer to batch box 3 rather than batch box 1.)  
3:Transmit Time  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (15) of the batch box you wish  
to create or modify. Here, weve pressed 3 and see either:  
2
At a certain time each day you press the key (e. g. Do this at  
5:05 PM today.) — Use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (i. e.,  
00), and then the time when the fax should perform the com-  
mand:  
Select Batch Box  
3:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
3:9-555-2110  
or  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different batch box, just use the  
numeric keypad to enter the correct batch box number before going on step 4.  
3:Transmit Time  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either:  
Note: To change a digit in the date or the time, press  
to move the cursor  
3:Fax Number  
_
3:Fax Number  
9-555-2110_  
leftward, or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then  
re-enter until the number is just as you want it.  
or  
2.24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To create or modify another batch box, repeat steps 2–11. To finish, press STOP  
.
When the date and time are as you wish, press ENTER.  
8
9
The LCD now displays:  
Erasing an empty batch box  
You can erase an empty batch box (if a box has documents stored in it, you cannot  
erase it; see the first Important” note after step 4, below).  
3:Name  
_
:Upper  
3:Name  
Bookkeeping_  
:Upper  
or  
To erase an empty batch box:  
The machine now is prompting you for a name for this batch box.  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 5, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
If you do not wish to enter or change this batch boxs name, skip to step 11.  
If you do wish to enter or change this batch boxs name, proceed to step 10.  
Select Batch Box  
1:No Number Stored  
Select Batch Box  
1:9-5551023  
or  
A batch boxs name may be up to 16 characters in length. You enter the name  
the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. Well review the  
process, here. (If youre changing a previously entered name, see the note at  
the end of this step.)  
10  
If this is the batch box you want to erase, skip to step 3. (However, our exam-  
ples from here will refer to batch box 2 rather than batch box 1.)  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (15) of the batch box you wish  
to erase. Here, weve pressed 2 and see:  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, you enter letters and other non-numeric char-  
2
acters through the one-touch keys.  
Select Batch Box  
2:9-1-972-5559900  
3:Name  
_
:Upper  
If you change your mind and wish to erase a different batch box, just go back  
to step 2 and perform it before going on step 4.  
The word Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only  
upper-case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an (not an r).  
3
4
R
Press ENTER. If the batch box is empty, the LCD shows:  
To change it so that pressing a one-touch key will produce a lower-case letter  
rather than an upper-case letter, press U2/a bc. The display will change to:  
Erase Batch Box  
Check Program/Enter  
3:Name  
_
:Lower  
Im p or ta n t: If you select a batch box which is not empty, the machine beeps  
and, before returning to standby mode, briefly displays:  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
R
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
Select Batch Box  
Document Stored  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press U1/ABC.  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, press U3/SYMBOL. This lets you  
enter the blue characters shown on the one-touch keypad.  
Erase any documents stored in the batch box (see page 2.27),  
then repeat this procedure from the beginning to erase the box.  
To use the CODE function at U4/CODE to enter a wide variety of characters,  
please review the explanation on page 2.3. The vast majority of the time, you  
will probably find the ABC, a bc and SYMBOL keys to be sufficient.  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the batch box youve  
selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will return to step 2.  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing any batch box, press STOP  
.
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
The machine will return to standby mode.  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
Press ENTER to erase the batch box.  
just one character in the name, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
5
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the name is just as you want it.  
Erase Batch Box  
** Complete **  
Press ENTER to save the batch box information.  
11  
2.25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To erase another batch box, repeat steps 2–5. To finish, press STOP  
.
Press START. If it wasnt already doing so due to a previous command, the  
machine will display Reserved” on the top line of the LCD. This means the  
document is stored in memory.  
5
Printing a list of your batch boxes  
You can easily print a list of your batch boxes. The list includes each boxs identifier  
number, the Location ID (if any), fax number and date/time of start.  
Printing a list of stored batch documents  
You can print a list of all the documents stored in your machines batch boxes. This  
will provide you with the documents’ file numbers so you can erase or print them if  
necessary. You need to know a files number to erase or print it on your machine.  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, N, 2, ENTER.  
Storing a document for batch transmission  
Your fax machine can store up to 40 documents (as opposed to pages) in each batch  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, N, 3, ENTER.  
box until the date and time you designate for a batch transmission.  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
Printing a document stored in a batch box  
The batch box must exist on your fax machine.  
You can print — without erasing from memory — a document stored in a batch box  
You must know the batch boxs one-digit number (1–5).  
set up on your fax machine. Heres how:  
To store a document in a batch box for batch transmission:  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 4, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
1
Insert the document and make any necessary adjustments as usual.  
Print Batch Doc.  
Enter Box No.  
1
2
_
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS five times and then press ENTER. The LCD  
will show:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box currently  
holding” the document you wish to print.  
2
3
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
_
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
Print Batch Doc.  
Enter File No.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit number for the batch box you  
wish to use. Here, weve entered 5 to indicate batch box 5.  
3
4
_
Batch Tx  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the documents two-digit file number (00–39).  
If the file number is 00–09, be sure to enter the leading zero.  
4
5
Press ENTER.  
Note: Tx is a common abbreviation for transmission.  
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
Your fax machine will print the desired document, then return to standby mode.  
Press Start  
Box: 5 File: 00  
Im p or ta n t: The file number (shown above as 00) tells you how many docu-  
ments are in this batch box. Your machine numbers files 0039.  
You need to know a files number to erase or print it on your  
fax. See also Printing a list of stored batch documents,” next  
column.  
2.26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Erasing a document stored in a batch box  
Its easy to erase a document stored in a batch box set up on your fax machine:  
Press /P ROGRAM, N, 6, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
1
Erase Batch Doc.  
Enter Box No.  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number (1–5) of the batch box currently  
holding” the document you wish to erase.  
2
3
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
Erase Batch Doc.  
Enter File No.  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the documents two-digit file number (00–39).  
If the file number is 00–09, be sure to enter the leading zero.  
4
5
Press ENTER. The fax machine now gives you one last chance to change your  
mind about the erasure.  
Erase Batch Doc.  
Check Program/Enter  
Im p or ta n t: To quit the operation without erasing this particular document,  
press /P ROGRAM and go back to step 4.  
Im p or ta n t: To quit the operation without erasing this or any other docu-  
ment, press STOP . The machine will return to standby mode.  
Press ENTER. The fax machine will erase the desired document, then return to  
standby mode.  
6
2.27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Special features  
Your fax machine has numerous special features to make your communications eas-  
ier. Well cover them here.  
Toggling the cover page  
Press /P ROGRAM, K, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Cover Page:  
Off  
Cover page  
Program/Enter  
For your greater convenience, your fax machine can store a cover page to send at  
the beginning of each outgoing fax. This page includes the current date and time,  
your Location ID and your fax number (as stored in the TTI) and a message of up to  
40 characters in length. The information appears in a box similar to this:  
To tell the fax machine it should send a cover page before each document you  
transmit, press /P ROGRAM.  
2
Cover Page:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Note: If you want to abort the operation so the cover page feature wont  
work, press /P ROGRAM again (so that Off” appears) and press STOP  
.
Fax Message From:  
Jan 19 1998 14:00  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
Now the cover page feature is working but your message line (shown in the exam-  
ple, left, as We appreciate your business. Thank you!”) is blank. To enter that  
message, see Entering the cover page message,” next page.  
Name:  
And Sew It Goes Co.  
972-555-2009  
Fax Number:  
We appreciate your business. Thank you!  
Note: If you send to another plain-paper fax machine, that machine will print this  
cover page as a full-sized page with the information box at the top, followed  
by the actual document youre faxing.  
How large a bottom margin will result when a thermal-paper fax machine  
prints the cover page varies from one model to the next. The only way to tell  
for sure is to send a transmission — with, obviously, the cover page feature  
activated (see right column) — to the specific thermal-paper machine in  
question and see what happens.  
2.28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Entering the cover page message  
Managing your fax with its journal and reports  
Press /P ROGRAM, K, 2, ENTER.  
1
2
Setting the activity journal  
J ust as a checkbook records your daily financial transactions, your fax machine  
keeps an activity journal which records the machines 100 most recent fax transac-  
tions. The activity journal lists the following information for each fax transaction:  
Now, use the one-touch keypad to enter a message for the cover page. The  
message can be up to 40 characters in length. You enter the message the  
same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. Well review the  
process, here. (If youre changing a previously entered message, see the note  
at the end of this step.)  
Assigned number, starting anew each day at 001  
Remote location called  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, you enter letters and other non-numeric char-  
Resolution mode  
acters through the one-touch keys.  
Starting date and time  
Cover Page :Upper  
_
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Department code (see pages 2.54–2.55)  
The word Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only  
upper-case letters. If you press R, the machine will see it as an  
R
(not an r).  
Result of the call — If preceded by an asterisk (*), this signifies an ECM communi-  
To change it so that pressing a one-touch key will produce a lower-case letter  
cation (see page 2.5)  
rather than an upper-case letter, press U2/a bc. The display will change to:  
Any special operations For example, a fax call made using an optional handset  
will appear as Manual”  
Cover Page :Lower  
_
If you wish, your fax machine will print the activity journal automatically after  
100 transactions. To toggle this automatic printing on or off:  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 1, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
1
Auto Print:  
Off  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press U1/ABC.  
Program/Enter  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, press U3/SYMBOL. This lets you  
enter the blue characters shown on the one-touch keypad.  
If this setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
To use the CODE function at U4/CODE to enter a wide variety of characters,  
please review the explanation on page 2.3. The vast majority of the time, you  
will probably find the ABC, a bc and SYMBOL keys to be sufficient.  
To change the setting, press  
desired choice appears. Here, weve chosen On.  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your  
2
3
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
Auto Print:  
On  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
Program/Enter  
just one character in the message, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the message is just as you want it.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
When the message is as you want it, press ENTER to save it.  
Printing an activity journal manually  
3
To see an activity journal immediately without waiting, just print the journal man-  
ually at any time by pressing /P ROGRAM, G, 2, ENTER.  
Printing the cover page  
To confirm that the cover page is as you wish, its easy to print a sample cover page  
from your fax machine. Press /P ROGRAM, K, 3, ENTER.  
2.29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To set the printing of either, or both, of these reports:  
Setting the reports: TCRs and RCRs  
Press /P ROGRAM, G, 3, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
You can set your fax machine to print reports.  
1
There are two different reports: a transmit confirmation report (TCR) and a receive  
confirmation report (RCR). You can receive a TCR after sending a fax to any Group 3 fax  
machine, but the RCR function works only when you send a fax to a compatible Muratec  
machine. (Consult your authorized Muratec dealer, or call Muratec Customer  
Support at [972] 364-3350, with any questions about such compatibility.) Choose  
the type of report you want, based on the fax machines to which youll be transmit-  
ting.  
TCR Selected  
Program/Enter  
If you see the report you wish to set, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your  
2
3
desired choice appears. Here, weve chosen RCR.  
Note: If receiving a fax from another Muratec machine (even the same model as  
yours), your fax machine cannot cause a sending Muratec fax machine to  
generate an RCR. Instead, the sending machine will print a TCR.  
RCR Selected  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The LCD will show:  
Information, please: what the reports tell you  
Auto Print:  
Off  
TCR  
Program/Enter  
The TCR gives you the following information for each communication:  
Date and time of the TCRs printout  
Remote location called  
Now your machine is asking whether it should print the selected report auto-  
matically after every fax you send.  
If you see the printing setting you want, skip to step 5.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 4.  
Resolution mode  
Starting date and time  
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Result of the call  
To toggle the printing setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your  
4
5
desired choice appears. Here, weve chosen On.  
Auto Print:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Any special operations For example, a fax call made using an optional handset  
will appear as Manual”  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Sample of the document — An image of the first page of the document  
If an error occurs, the TCR tells you the remote location called and the error code and  
error message (see pages 3.8–3.9).  
To turn on (or off) the confirmation report feature for only the next fax transmis-  
sion:  
RCR  
Press REVIEW COMMANDS, REVIEW COMMANDS.  
The RCR gives you the following information for each communication:  
1
2
Date and time  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM. The On” setting activates  
Remote location called  
automatic printing of a confirmation report, and the Offsetting disables  
this printing, for only the next transmission.  
Assigned number, starting anew each day at 001  
Resolution mode  
When the setting is as you want it, press ENTER.  
3
Duration, in minutes and seconds  
Length, in number of pages  
Following the next transmission, your machine will return to the setting you speci-  
fied previously (step 4, above).  
Result of the call — Either OK” or an error code (see pages 3.8–3.9)  
2.30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Database polling  
To poll a document from a remote fax machines memory:  
Polling  
Polling allows someone to fax a document to you without the other person having to  
make (and pay for) the call. Your machine can perform:  
Make sure that:  
1
Regular polling — Retrieves a document from the remote fax machine.  
The remote fax machine is a memory-equipped Muratec or Murata fax  
machine which has a file stored in its memory, ready for polling.  
Database polling — (Possible only in communication with certain memory-equipped  
Muratec or Murata fax machines) Retrieves a document stored as a file in the remote  
faxs memory. Great for getting price list and other frequently updated documents.  
You know the one- or two-digit database file number of each file you wish  
to poll from the remote machine.  
Continuous polling — Retrieves continuously a document from any remote fax  
machine for the designated time. For example, a hospital pharmacy can use this  
to check on orders waiting in other faxes in the hospital.  
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS four times and ENTER once.  
The LCD will show:  
2
3
Polling  
File No.  
Note: When you wish to end a continuous polling operation, you must delete it  
_
using the Review Commands feature (see page 2.22).  
Enter the database file number for the document you wish to poll. You can  
enter as many as 10 file numbers in one operation. To enter more than one  
(as in this example), press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS between each to insert a  
comma — but d o n ot insert a comma after the last file number.  
Regular polling  
To perform regular polling of a document from any remote fax machine:  
Make sure that the document is actually sitting in the remote fax machine.  
1
Polling  
File No.  
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS four times and then press ENTER twice.  
The LCD will show:  
2
5,26,84  
Enter Fax Number  
_
When youre done with the file number entry, press ENTER. The LCD will  
show:  
4
5
Enter Fax Number  
_
Enter the remote fax machines number by either pressing a one-touch key,  
entering a speed-dial number or just dialing the number normally through  
the numeric keypad.  
3
Enter the remote fax machines number by either pressing a one-touch key,  
entering a speed-dial number or just dialing the number normally through  
the numeric keypad.  
To perform the regular polling now, skip to step 8.  
To perform delayed regular polling, proceed to step 5.  
4
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
To perform the database polling now, skip to step 10.  
To perform delayed database polling, proceed to step 7.  
5
6
7
Delayed  
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
Delayed  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time when your machine  
should perform the delayed regular polling.  
6
Press ENTER.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time when your machine  
should perform the delayed database polling.  
7
8
8
Press START.  
Press ENTER.  
9
10  
When it performs the polling command, your machine will dial the number and,  
upon making contact with the other machine, begin receiving the document as if the  
other machine had placed the call.  
Press START.  
2.31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Your machine will dial the number and, upon making contact with the other  
Enter the remote fax machines number by either pressing a one-touch key,  
entering a speed-dial number or just dialing the number normally through  
the numeric keypad.  
machine, begin receiving the file(s) as if the other machine had placed the call.  
7
8
Continuous polling  
To perform continuous polling from one or more remote fax machines:  
If you are entering only one number for continuous polling, skip to step 9.  
To add any additional fax numbers for this operation, proceed to step 8.  
Make sure that the document is actually sitting in the feeder of the remote  
fax machine.  
To add each successive fax number, press BROADCAST between each one to  
insert a comma (GROUP DIAL inserts its own comma), then enter the number as in  
step 7. You can specify up to 10 numbers (and/or call groups) for continuous  
polling.  
1
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS six times and then press ENTER.  
The LCD will show the current time:  
2
Press Start  
C,9-5551204,S118,J  
Cont Polling  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the last fax number.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time when your machine should begin  
the continuous polling. Here, weve set it for 7:00 AM.  
3
Note: If you enter characters by mistake, just press CANCEL to clear them  
before proceeding.  
Cont Polling  
Press START.  
9
When it performs the polling command, your machine will dial each number and,  
upon making contact with the other machine, begin receiving the document as if the  
other machine had placed the call. It will continue the process throughout the time  
period you have selected in steps 3–5.  
Note: To move the cursor to a specific digit, press  
to move the cursor left-  
ward, or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that digit.  
When the start time is as you want, press ENTER to save it.The LCD will show:  
4
5
Cont Polling  
End Time:  
07:00  
The other side of the coin: being polled  
Not only can you poll, you also can be polled. To set up a document for regular or  
database polling by another Muratec or Murata machine:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time when your machine should finish  
the continuous polling. Here, weve set it for 3:00 PM.  
If your fax machine is set for Tel Ready reception, press AUTO ANSWER to  
change it to Fax Ready reception, causing the Auto Answer light to glow.  
1
Cont Polling  
End Time:  
15:00  
Im p or ta n t: Your machine ca n t be polled if its in Tel Ready mode.  
Note: If you set an end time earlier than the start time you entered in step 3,  
Insert the document.  
2
3
the continuous polling will end at the selected end time tomorrow.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary. (Your fax machine will be trans-  
mitting to the machine doing the polling.)  
Note: To move the cursor to a specific digit, press  
to move the cursor left-  
ward, or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that digit.  
Press /P ROGRAM, D, 1, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
When the end time is as you want, press ENTER to save it.The LCD will show:  
4
6
Store Polling Doc  
Enter Fax Number  
_
File No.  
_
2.32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Printing a stored polling document  
To print, without erasing, a document youve stored for regular or database polling:  
If you are storing this document for regular polling, skip to step 7.  
If you are storing this document for database polling, proceed to step 6.  
5
6
7
Use the numeric keypad to enter a one- or two-digit database file number to  
identify the stored document.  
Press /P ROGRAM, D, 3, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
1
Print Polling Doc  
Press ENTER. Your fax will scan the document into memory and return to  
standby mode.  
File No.  
_
If you are printing a document set up for regular polling, skip to step 4.  
If you are printing a document set up for database polling, proceed to step 3.  
Note: If you were using Tel Ready” mode before step 1 and wish to return to it  
after the remote machine has polled your document, press AUTO ANSWER to  
turn off Auto Answer, causing the Auto Answer light to cease glowing.  
Bu t d o th is on ly a fter you a r e su r e th e r em ote m a ch in e h a s p olled  
you r d ocu m en t.  
2
3
4
Use the numeric keypad to enter a one- or two-digit database file number to  
identify the stored document.  
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will print the document.  
Erasing a stored polling document  
To erase from your machines memory a document youve stored for regular or data-  
base polling by another machine:  
Limiting polling access to your fax machine  
Your machines closed network setting (see page 2.52) works for polling, as well. If a  
calling fax doesnt “present” the proper passcode, it cannot poll from your fax.  
Press /P ROGRAM, D, 2, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
1
Note: However, if youre using the Block J unk Fax feature (see pages 2.52–2.54),  
even incoming calls which meet the passcode test must come from appropri-  
ate phone numbers.  
Erase Polling Doc  
File No.  
_
If you are erasing a document set up for regular polling, skip to step 4.  
If you are erasing a document set up for database polling, proceed to step 3.  
2
3
4
OneLine + distinctive ring detection  
Use the numeric keypad to enter a one- or two-digit database file number to  
identify the stored document.  
It used to be that, to have two phone numbers, you had to have two phone lines  
(and the more expensive phone equipment that usually involves). But many phone  
companies now offer their customers a special service which makes it possible for  
one phone line to do the work of two — a real boon in this day of the SOHO” (small  
office/home office).  
Press ENTER. Your fax machine will erase the document from memory.  
With this service, you physically still have one phone line; but, electronically, you  
have two phone numbers. Each number rings your phone in a different way than  
the other number does.  
This makes it easy for you to have both (for example) a business number and a home  
number on one phone line, so you can answer one with J ane Doe Consulting,” and  
the other with Hello.” You get the idea: this works because youre smart enough to  
tell the difference between the distinctive patterns of the two rings.  
But what if your fax machine, too, could be smart enough? Then it could ignore one  
of the two numbers, knowing” that its supposed to answer only the other one.  
Well, as youve probably guessed by now, thats exactly what your fax machine can do.  
All you have to do is give it a little help at the beginning and begin to enjoy the benefits  
of its OneLine + distinctive ring detection (DRD) feature.  
2.33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
In order that you may use OneLine + DRD, your phone company must set up your  
Press ENTER.  
distinctive ring service. When it does, it will assign a ring pattern, expressed in  
time. For example, the standard telephone ring is 2 seconds on(ringing) and 4  
seconds off” (silent), after which it repeats itself (hence the term, ring pattern).  
4
Ring Pattern:  
A
Program/Enter  
Some telephone companies provide only a very general description — for example,  
short-short-long” — of their DRD ring patterns. Fortunately, however, your fax has  
eight possible distinctive ring patterns for use with OneLine + DRD; one of them  
should work with your phone companys DRD service. This chart lists the patterns:  
If A” is the pattern you want, skip to step 7.  
If not, proceed to step 6.  
5
6
Press  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your desired pattern appears (in our  
example here, C”):  
P a tter n  
On e com p lete r in g p a tter n (secon d s)  
Ring Pattern:  
C
Program/Enter  
0.8 on, 0.4 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.4 on, 0.2 off, 0.8 on, 4.0 off  
0.3 on, 0.2 off, 1.0 on, 0.2 off, 0.3 on, 4.0 off  
1.0 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.5 ms off  
Press ENTER to set your machine to the displayed ring pattern.  
7
Im p or ta n t: If your telephone company gives you only very general ring pattern  
specifications, or if you otherwise encounter a problem while trying to  
use your machines DRD feature, p lea se tr y ALL of th e listed r in g  
p a tter n s. (If you still have a problem after trying a ll of the patterns,  
please call the Muratec Customer Support Center (from the United  
States, call [972] 364-3350; for the number to call from Canada, check  
your in-box documentation).  
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 3.0 off  
0.5 on, 0.5 off, 1.0 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.0 off  
0.4 on, 0.6 off, 0.4 on, 4.6 off  
1.5 on, 0.5 off, 0.5 on, 3.5 off  
Im p or ta n t: With your machine set for using DRD, it wont respond to any ring pat-  
tern other than the one youve selected, above. To reset the fax so it  
will respond once again to normal rings, repeat steps 2–4, above —  
except, in step 3, toggle it to Off.” Your fax now will respond nor-  
mally.  
For example: pattern  
0.2 seconds silent, 0.3 seconds ringing and 4 seconds silent; then it goes back to the  
first 0.3-second ring and starts over.  
C
is 0.3 seconds ringing, 0.2 seconds silent, 1 second ringing,  
To use DRD on your fax machine:  
Contact your phone company and confirm that the phone company has set up  
DRD service for you. If possible, also find out which distinctive ring pattern the  
phone company has assigned you.  
1
Call request  
Wondering why your monitor speakers activation key is called MONITOR/CALL?  
Now, well explain the CALL part of the name. It may be hard to believe, but you  
actually can send or receive a fax message and have a regular phone conversation  
on the same call (although, obviously, not at the same time). This is called a call  
request. It doesnt matter whether youre sending the fax or receiving it. You may  
fax first and then talk, or talk first and then fax.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 9, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
2
DRD:  
Off  
Program/Enter  
If you see the setting you wish, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 3.  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, the remote fax machine must have a similar  
call-request capability. Also, of course, your machine must have an  
optional handset attached.  
To change the setting, press  
desired choice appears. Here, weve chosen On.  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your  
3
Note: On an F-150, communicating this way disables V.34” mode, causing the  
DRD:  
On  
F-150 to handle the call in normal ITU-T Group 3 fashion.  
Program/Enter  
2.34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Shortly, the line will open and the person at the other end of the line will  
answer. You and the other person now can have a normal phone conversa-  
tion.  
Faxing/receiving first, then talking  
To send or receive a fax first and then talk:  
2
While your fax machine is sending or receiving the fax, press MONITOR/CALL.  
1
2
Numbering pages  
J ust before sending a fax, you can set your fax machine to number each page in  
order. This will help the recipient (or recipients) keep track of all the pages.  
At the remote fax machine, the ringer will ring after that machine receives  
each page.  
If someone answers at the remote fax machine, your fax machine will ring  
several times. If so, pick up the optional handset. In a few seconds, the line  
will open and you can begin your conversation.  
3
To set up page numbering:  
Count the number of pages in your document.  
1
2
3
4
Talking first, then sending a fax  
To talk first and then send a fax:  
Insert the document.  
Adjust resolution and contrast, if necessary.  
When your phone conversation is through, dont hang up.  
1
2
3
4
If you want to toggle between transmission from the feeder or transmission  
from memory, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Insert the document you wish to fax.  
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
L
,
ENTER. The LCD will show:  
5
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up  
his/her handset. Dont hang up you r handset yet!  
Enter # Of Pages  
When you hear fax tones, press START and — now! hang up your fax  
machines optional handset. Your fax machine will send the document.  
5
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit count of the number of pages in  
your document, based on what you counted in step 1. If there are fewer than  
10 pages, enter a leading zero and then the number (e. g., 04 for four pages).  
6
7
Talking first, then receiving a fax  
To talk first and then receive a fax:  
Press ENTER.  
When your phone conversation is through, dont hang up.  
Enter Fax Number  
_
1
2
Tell the person at the other fax machine to press START and to hang up  
his/her handset. Dont hang up yours yet!  
From here, proceed normally with the desired type of transmission. When the  
remote fax machine prints your document, a note on the right side of your TTI will  
indicate the number of the page — such as P.02” for page two.  
When you hear fax tones, press START and — now! hang up your machines  
optional handset. Your machine will receive and print out the document.  
3
Responding to a call request  
If someone requests a call from you during a fax communication, youll hear a long  
ring after the receiving machine has received each page. To answer the call request:  
The power of TriAccess  
The F-150s and F-120s TriAccess feature sharply reduces the time you might oth-  
erwise spend waiting for the machine to finish its work and let you get back to your  
own work. TriAccess is a more powerful version of what already is a pretty powerful  
feature, called dual access. While a fax with normal dual access performs one memory  
operation, you can do a second operation: set up a memory or delayed transmission,  
Lift your machines optional handset, and listen for a few seconds. You may  
hear a brief series of fax tones.  
1
2.35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
print a report, make settings (including on the autodialer) or even make copies.  
But the F-150s and F-120s TriAccess allows a minimum of three operations at once. For example, even if the machine is (1) printing a copy and (2) receiving into memory, it is  
(3) still available for you to scan in documents for memory transmission.  
Note: The F-100 does not have TriAccess; however, it does have dual access.  
Using the power of programmable one-touch keys  
Programmable one-touch  
The programmable one-touch keys 1–P 12 simplify complex fax operations, letting  
P
you really tap into your machines power.  
Note: Toggle between the two sets of programmable keys,  
P
1–P 6 and 7–P 12, by  
P
keys  
turning the fliptab back and forth; whichever set is visible is ready for use.  
You can teach these keys the following multi-step operations for one-keypress con-  
venience (the pages shown contain instructions for the specific operations):  
Delayed transmission (pages 2.21–2.23)  
Broadcasting (pages 2.18–2.20)  
Relay broadcast initiation (pages 2.19–2.20)  
SecureMail transmission (pages 2.46–2.49)  
Polling, regular and database (not continuous) (pages 2.31–2.33)  
Batch transmission (pages 2.24–2.27)  
There is a great deal of similarity among how you set the various operations; but,  
for your convenience, well give you full instructions for each one. J ust FYI, however,  
well summarize by saying that, each time, you tell the machine four simple things:  
How — The key youre programming  
Wh o — The number(s) the machine should dial  
Wh a t — The operation it should perform  
Wh en — The date(s) and time(s) when you want it to perform the operation.  
Programming a delayed transmission  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.43.  
To program a delayed transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD either shows:  
1
Select Program No.  
… or indicates a command already is programmed into this key.  
If  
P
01 is the key you want to program, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
from here will say P08” rather than P01.)  
2.36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Theres a choice to make. Instruct your fax to carry out this delayed command  
Select the key in which you want to program a command or change a previ-  
ously stored command — if necessary, turn the fliptab to see it, as described  
2
7
in one of the following ways:  
earlier — and then press it. Here, weve selected 08.  
P
Op tion 1: Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different programmable one-  
touch key, go back to step 2 before going on to step 4.  
Delayed  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (i. e.,  
00), and then the time when the fax could perform the command:  
P08:Fax Number  
_
P08:Fax Number  
9-5558743_  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system may require. The num-  
ber can be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
Delayed  
P08:Fax Number  
9-5550629_  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
8
9
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not wish to enter or change any other keys programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
If you do wish to enter or change this keys programming, go back to step 3.  
If you wish to enter or change another keys programming, go back to step 2.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
to  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
Programming a broadcast  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.43.  
Programming a broadcast is very similar to programming a delayed transmission  
except that, rather than specifying just one phone number, you set up multiple  
numbers to which the transmission should go.  
just one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
6
To program a broadcast into a programmable one-touch key:  
Delayed  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD either shows:  
1
Select Program No.  
… or indicates a command already is programmed into this key.  
If  
P
01 is the key you want to program, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
from here will say P06” rather than P01.)  
2.37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Select the key in which you want to program a command or change a previ-  
ously stored command — if necessary, turn the fliptab to see it, as described  
Theres a choice to make. Instruct your fax to carry out this delayed command  
in one of the following ways:  
2
7
earlier — and then press it. Here, weve selected 06.  
P
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different programmable one-  
touch key, go back to step 2 before going on to step 4.  
Delayed  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (i. e.,  
00), and then the time when the fax could perform the command:  
P06:Fax Number  
_
P06:Fax Number  
9-5558743_  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter up to 20 fax numbers — any combination of  
call groups, other one-touch keys, speed-dial numbers and numbers you enter  
with only the numeric keypad.  
5
Delayed  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
8
9
Between each number or call group, press BROADCAST to enter a comma  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot insert a comma after the la st number.  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not wish to enter or change any other keys programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
If you do wish to enter or change this keys programming, go back to step 3.  
If you wish to enter or change another keys programming, go back to step 2.  
To enter a speed-dial number, press SP EED DIAL/TEL INDEX and the numbers  
three-digit identifier.  
To enter a call group, press GROUP DIAL and the groups identifier number.  
P06: Fax Number  
Programming a SecureMail transmission  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.43.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
to  
Note: For this operation to work, three things must be true:  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
The remote fax machine must be a Muratec fax machine (other than an  
F-76, F-85 or F-86) with SecureMail reception capability.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
The SecureMail mailbox into which youre faxing must exist on the  
remote machine.  
just one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
You must know the mailboxs one-digit mailbox number.  
If you want the broadcast to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTER and skip to step 9.  
If you want to delay the broadcast (perhaps to take advantage of lower phone  
rates), press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER.  
6
2.38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To program a SecureMail transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS two times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
6
7
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD either shows:  
1
Select Program No.  
S Mail Tx  
S Mail No.  
_
… or indicates a command already is programmed into this key.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate one-digit SecureMail mail-  
box number. In this example, the number is 5.  
If P 01 is the key you want to program, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
from here will say P11” rather than P01.)  
S Mail Tx  
Select the key in which you want to program a command or change a previ-  
ously stored command — if necessary, turn the fliptab to see it, as described  
2
When finished, press ENTER.  
earlier — and then press it. Here, weve selected 11.  
P
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the  
key, press ENTER and skip to step 11.  
If you want to delay the transmission (perhaps to take advantage of lower  
phone rates), press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER.  
Select Program No.  
8
9
If you change your mind and wish to select a different programmable one-  
touch key, go back to step 2 before going on to step 4.  
3
4
Theres a choice to make. Instruct your fax to carry out this delayed command  
in one of the following ways:  
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either  
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
P11:Fax Number  
_
P11:Fax Number  
9-5552208_  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system may require. The num-  
ber can be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
Delayed  
P11: Fax Number  
9-5558422_  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (i. e.,  
00), and then the time when the fax could perform the command:  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
to  
Delayed  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
10  
11  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
just one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not wish to enter or change any other keys programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
If you do wish to enter or change this keys programming, go back to step 3.  
If you wish to enter or change another keys programming, go back to step 2.  
2.39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Programming a relay broadcast initiation  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.43.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the hub” machines number exactly as your  
machine should dial it, including whatever codes your phone system may  
require. The number can be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
Note: For this operation to work, three things must be true:  
P05:Fax Number  
9-5550629  
The remote fax machine must be a Muratec fax machine (other than an  
F-86) with hub” capability.  
The call group(s) to which youre faxing must exist on the remote machine.  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
to  
You must know the two-digit number for each call group to which youre  
faxing.  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
To program a relay broadcast initiation into a programmable one-touch key:  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD either shows:  
1
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
Select Program No.  
just one character in the number, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
… or indicates a command already is programmed into this key.  
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS three times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
6
7
If 01 is the key you want to program, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
P
from here will say P05” rather than P01.)  
Relay Tx  
Group No.  
Select the key in which you want to program a command or change a previ-  
ously stored command — if necessary, turn the fliptab to see it, as described  
2
_
earlier — and then press it. Here, weve selected 05.  
P
Use the numeric keypad to enter the two-digit identifier (01–32) for the first  
call group. You can specify up to 10 separate groups for each relay broadcast  
initiation; between the entry of each new group, press GROUP DIAL to insert a  
comma bu t do not insert a comma after the last group number.  
Select Program No.  
For example, here, weve entered 0, 4, GROUP DIAL, 1, 1, GROUP DIAL, 2, 4:  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different programmable one-  
touch key, go back to step 2 before going on to step 4.  
3
4
Relay Tx  
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either  
P05:Fax Number  
_
P05:Fax Number  
9-5558743  
Note: The LCD shows only four characters of the group numbers.  
Im p or ta n t: Again, d o n ot insert a comma after the last group number.  
When finished, press ENTER.  
or  
If you want the transmission to begin immediately every time you press the  
key, press ENTER and skip to step 11.  
If you want to delay the transmission (perhaps to take advantage of lower  
phone rates), press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER.  
8
2.40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To program a polling operation, whether regular or database, into a programmable  
Theres a choice to make. Instruct your fax to carry out this delayed command  
in one of the following ways:  
9
one-touch key:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD either shows:  
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
1
Select Program No.  
… or indicates a command already is programmed into this key.  
Delayed  
If P 01 is the key you want to program, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
from here will say P04” rather than P01.)  
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (i. e.,  
00), and then the time when the fax could perform the command:  
Select the key in which you want to program a command or change a previ-  
ously stored command — if necessary, turn the fliptab to see it, as described  
earlier — and then press it. Here, weve selected 04.  
2
P
Select Program No.  
Delayed  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different programmable one-  
touch key, go back to step 2 before going on to step 4.  
3
4
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
10  
11  
Press ENTER. The LCD now shows either  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not wish to enter or change any other keys programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
If you do wish to enter or change this keys programming, go back to step 3.  
If you wish to enter or change another keys programming, go back to step 2.  
P04:Fax Number  
_
P04:Fax Number  
9-5557312_  
or  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number exactly as your machine should  
dial it, including whatever codes your phone system may require. The num-  
ber can be up to 40 characters in length:  
5
Programming regular and database polling  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.43.  
P04: Fax Number  
9-5550696  
Note: For database polling to work, three things must be true:  
Your display can show only 20 characters at a time. To view characters beyond  
The remote fax machine must be a memory-equipped Muratec fax  
machine (other than an F-76, F-85 or F-86) with a file stored in its data-  
base memory and ready for polling.  
those 20 (such as with an international long-distance number), press  
to  
scroll leftward or /P ROGRAM to scroll rightward.  
Im p or ta n t: Do n ot press ENTER.  
The database file which youre polling must exist on the remote machine.  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
You must know the one- or two-digit file number for each database file  
you wish to poll.  
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
just one character in the number, press  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the number is just as you want it.  
to move the cursor leftward,  
Note: You cannot program continuous polling into a programmable one-touch key.  
For more information on continuous polling, see page 2.32.  
2.41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Now, while you still can see the fax number on the LCD, press  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS four times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Press ENTER, ENTER.  
6
10  
11  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not wish to enter or change any other keys programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
Polling  
File No.  
_
If you do wish to enter or change this keys programming, go back to step 3.  
If you wish to enter or change another keys programming, go back to step 2.  
If performing regular (not database) polling, press ENTER and skip to step 8.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one- or two-digit identifier for each  
database file you want to poll. You can specify up to 10 files; between the  
entry of each new file, press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS to insert a comma bu t  
do not insert a comma after the last file number.  
For example, here, weve entered 2, 6, COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, 2, 7,  
COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, 2, 8, COMMUNICATION OP TIONS (the latter in  
preparation for another file number):  
7
Programming a batch transmission  
Note: To erase a programmable one-touch key, refer to page 2.43.  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The batch box youre using must exist on your fax machine.  
You must know the batch boxs one-digit identifier number (1–5).  
Polling  
To program a batch transmission into a programmable one-touch key:  
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 1, ENTER. The LCD either shows:  
Note: The LCD shows only seven characters of the file numbers.  
Im p or ta n t: Again, d o n ot insert a comma after the last file number.  
When finished, press ENTER.  
1
Select Program No.  
If you want the polling to begin immediately every time you press the key,  
press ENTER and skip to step 11.  
If you want to delay the polling (perhaps to take advantage of lower phone  
rates), press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER.  
… or indicates a command already is programmed into this key.  
8
9
Note: To program a key into which a command other than batch transmis-  
sion has already been programmed, you first erase the key (see page  
2.43). Then, return to these instructions and select that key.  
If a batch transmission is already programmed into this key, you can  
change the batch box number, in step 6. (But you cant change the key  
to another kind of command. To do that, you must first erase the key  
and then program that key as described elsewhere in this section.)  
Theres a choice to make. Instruct your fax to carry out this delayed command  
in one of the following ways:  
Op tion 1:  
Perform the command once at a certain time on a certain day of  
the month. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM on the 30th.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter the date  
and time when the fax should perform the command:  
If 01 is the key you want to program, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
P
from here will say P07” rather than P01.)  
Select the key in which you want to program a command or change a previ-  
ously stored command — if necessary, turn the fliptab to see it, as described  
Delayed  
2
3
earlier — and then press it. Here, weve selected 07.  
P
Op tion 2:  
Perform the command at a certain time each day you press the  
key. (For example, Do this at 5:05 PM today.)  
To select this option, use the numeric keypad to enter 0, 0 (i. e.,  
00), and then the time when the fax could perform the command:  
Select Program No.  
If you change your mind and wish to select a different programmable one-  
touch key, go back to step 2 before going on to step 4.  
Delayed  
2.42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
If you programmed this key to delay its operation, the LCD will show:  
Do n ot enter any characters here (if you do, you cant program a batch trans-  
mission into this key). Instead, on ly press ENTER and then proceed to step 5.  
4
** Reserved **  
A4  
Memory 95%  
P07:Fax Number  
_
However, if you programmed this key to perform the operation immediately after  
the keypress, the LCD will show the number:  
Note: If you accidentally enter any characters here, press CANCEL as many  
times as needed to erase a ll of them befor e you proceed to step 5.  
Note: If this key already holds a batch transmission, skip to step 6.  
9-1-972-555-4335  
A4  
Normal  
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS five times and then press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
5
6
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
Erasing a programmable one-touch key  
_
Press /P ROGRAM, C, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows something like:  
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the one-digit identifier for the batch box you  
wish to assign to this one-touch key. Here, weve entered 5:  
Select Program No.  
P01:Delayed  
Batch Tx  
Enter Box No.  
5_  
If 01 is the key you want to erase, skip to step 3. (However, our examples  
P
from here will say P10” rather than P01.)  
Note: To change an identifier already entered, press CANCEL to erase it.  
Then re-enter until the entry is just as you want it.  
Press the programmable one-touch key you want to erase. Here, weve  
2
selected 10:  
P
Press ENTER.  
7
8
Select Program No.  
P10:Polling  
The LCD now displays the next programmable one-touch key.  
If you do not wish to enter or change any other keys programming, press STOP  
to return your machine to its usual standby mode.  
If you do wish to enter or change this keys programming, go back to step 3.  
If you wish to enter or change another keys programming, go back to step 2.  
If you change your mind and wish to erase a different programmable one-  
touch key, just press that key before going on step 4.  
3
4
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Erase P One-Touch  
Check Program/Enter  
Programmable one-touch fax dialing  
To dial a fax call using a programmable one-touch number:  
Im p or ta n t: If you want to quit without erasing the programmable one-  
touch key youve selected, press /P ROGRAM. The fax will  
return to step 2.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Press ENTER to erase the number.  
5
Toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory if necessary, by  
pressing MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Erase P One-Touch  
** Complete **  
Press the programmable one-touch key in which youve stored the number.  
4
To erase another programmable one-touch key, repeat steps 2–5. Or press STOP to  
return to standby mode.  
Your fax will perform the operation either now or at whatever other time you set.  
Note: To review each available operations details, please review its appropriate  
instructions. See page 2.36 for a list of where you may find each operation.  
2.43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Printing a list of your programmable one-touch keys  
You fax machine can print a list of the commands youve stored in your programmable one-touch keys. The list includes each keys one-touch letter, the telephone number,  
when the command should start, which command youve selected and — if applicable — the selected call group(s), SecureMail mailbox(es) or database file(s) youve stored in  
the key.  
To print the list, press /P ROGRAM, C, 3, ENTER.  
Keeping things secure  
2.44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Your machine has a number of features to enhance the security of your fax commu-  
nications. These security features can help you let your private fax documents stay  
private, avoid unwanted outside communication and even protect against unautho-  
rized use of your machine — as well as control its authorized use.  
Locking up tight: operation protection  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have set the passcode, as described  
in the left column.  
Because this is a powerful machine you have here — and, besides, youre paying for  
its phone calls — you may not want just anybody to use it. Thats why weve pro-  
vided operation protection. When this feature is activated, only those who enter the  
proper passcode (see The key to it all: the password,” left column) can send faxes  
from — or even make settings on — the machine.  
The key to it all: the passcode  
Your machine has a protection passcode system which, as youll see, is central to the  
machines security capabilities. Normally, this four-digit passcode is set to 0000  
(four zeroes). This turns off passcode operation. But, if you set the passcode to any-  
thing besides 0000, this passcode provides access to numerous other security  
capabilities well describe in succeeding pages.  
Activating operation protection  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 7, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
J
1
2
3
To set your machines passcode:  
Set Opr. Protect  
Decide upon, and then write down the four-digit passcode (0001–9999) you  
want to use and put it in a safe place.  
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here, weve entered 6296:  
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000. This turns off passcode protection.  
Set Opr. Protect  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 6, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
J
2
Protect Passcode  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Opr.Protect:  
Off  
If you are creating the passcode, use the numeric keypad to enter 0000.  
If you are modifying an existing passcode, enter the existing passcode.  
3
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 6.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 5.  
4
5
4
5
Enter the desired four-digit passcode. Here, weve entered 6296:  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your  
Protect Passcode  
desired setting appears. In this example, weve chosen On.”  
Opr.Protect:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the passcode.  
6
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Note: Anytime you want to turn off the passcode, change the passcode back to  
6
0000 by repeating steps 1–6 and entering 0000 in step 5.  
2.45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Using your fax machine during operation protection  
Set Security Rx  
When you press any key on your machine, the LCD will show:  
1
Operation Protected  
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
3
Security Rx:  
Off  
Program/Enter  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode (here, weve entered  
the passcode we set previously; see page 2.44).  
2
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 6.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 5.  
4
5
Operation Protected  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your  
desired setting appears. In this example, weve chosen On.”  
If you make an error, press  
or /P ROGRAM until the cursor appears under  
the character you wish to change; then enter the correct character.  
Security Rx:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to present” the passcode to the machine.  
3
Press ENTER. The LCD shows the machines current clock setting:  
The machine now will let you go on to the next step in the fax operation.  
6
Note: If you start an operation while the first is still underway (see The power of  
TriAccess,” page 2.35), the machine will require the passcode from you once  
again before proceeding with your new request. However, the first operation  
will proceed unaffected, even if you fail to enter the correct passcode for the  
second entry.  
Set Security Rx  
If you want security reception to begin now (and at this same time every day),  
skip to step 9.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 8.  
7
8
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time (24-hour format) when security  
reception should begin every day. Type over” the numerals displayed. Here,  
weve entered 17:35 (5:35 PM):  
Print it later, when its safe: security reception  
Your fax machine has a security reception capability. This means that you can tell  
the machine to keep all received faxes in memory (but not print them) after a cer-  
tain time; then, later, you instruct it to go ahead and print out the saved faxes. This  
is great if, for example, you have concerns about after-hours workers nosing around  
in documents intended for your eyes only!  
Set Security Rx  
To change a digit, press  
to move leftward, or /P ROGRAM to move right-  
ward, to that digit. Then, enter the correct digit.  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have preset the passcode (see page  
2.44) to something besides 0000; and, of course, you must know  
the passcode.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
9
Note: In the following instructions, your machines LCD shortens the word  
Transmission to Tx and the word Receive to Rx.  
Activating security reception  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
O
[the letter O, not a zero], 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Set Security Rx  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here, weve entered 6296:  
2
2.46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Printing from (and turning off) security reception  
Receiving SecureMail  
When security reception is active, an incoming fax goes directly into your machines  
memory (but is not printed) and lights the MEMORY RECEIVE light.  
Creating, modifying or clearing a SecureMail mailbox  
To receive SecureMail, you must have SecureMail mailboxes set up on your fax  
machine. You may wish also to modify existing SecureMail mailboxes (but, to do so,  
you must know each mailboxs ID code; see step 4, below).  
To retrieve the faxes received during this security reception (and to return your  
machine to normal reception until the next time):  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
O
[the letter O, not a zero], 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
To create, modify or clear a SecureMail mailbox:  
1
2
3
Print Mem Rx Doc.  
Press /P ROGRAM, E, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Set SecureMail Box  
S Mail No.  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode. Here, weve entered 6296:  
Print Mem Rx Doc.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number, 0–9, of the mailbox you wish to  
create. Here, weve entered 5:  
2
Set SecureMail Box  
Press ENTER.  
If youve entered the correct passcode, your fax machine will print all docu-  
ments in — and then erase them from — its memory; and it will turn  
security reception back off until reaching the appropriate time again.  
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
3
4
If youve entered an incorrect code, your fax machine will refuse to print  
and security reception remains active.  
S Mail No.  
5
Your next move depends on whether youre creating or modifying the mail-  
box:  
Receiving and sending SecureMail  
If creating — Use the numeric keypad to enter 0000 and press ENTER.  
Perhaps you dont want to protect all receptions, but just certain faxes and at any  
time (without having to set it, as is necessary with security reception; see page 2.45).  
Or, for that matter, you may wish to send secure documents to someone else and  
not worry about whether an unauthorized person near that persons fax might hap-  
pen to see the documents.  
If modifying — Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper ID code and  
press ENTER. If you enter an invalid ID code, the fax machine will reject the  
attempt and abort this operation.  
The LCD now displays:  
5
Thats why your fax machine has Muratecs time-tested SecureMail feature.  
SecureMail uses some of your faxs memory as paperless electronic mailboxes.”  
Your machine can use up to 10 of these mailboxes.  
5:Name  
_
:Upper  
5:Name  
:Upper  
or  
Bookkeeping_  
Note: Please dont confuse SecureMails 10 electronic mailboxes with your  
machines five electronic batch boxes (see pages 2.24–2.27). While both use  
electronic memory, they are not the same.  
The machine now is prompting you for a name for this mailbox. For example,  
you may wish to name it Ernie if someone named Ernie is going to be the  
usual recipient of SecureMail faxed to this mailbox.  
Also, you can send SecureMail to any of certain Muratec fax machines. (Your autho-  
rized Muratec dealer can give you further information, or you may call Muratec  
Customer Support at [972] 364-3350.)  
If you do not wish to enter or change this mailboxs name, skip to step 7.  
If you do wish to enter or change this mailboxs name, proceed to step 6.  
If you wish to clear this SecureMail mailbox, press CANCEL to erase all char-  
acters in the mailbox name (and skip steps 6–11).  
2.47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
A mailboxs name may be up to 16 characters in length. You enter the name  
Check the following list to determine your next move.  
6
8
9
the same way you entered your fax name during EasyStart. Well review the  
process, here. (If youre changing a previously entered name, see the note at  
the end of this step.)  
If, in step 6, you changed the name of an existing SecureMail mailbox and  
you want to keep its ID code the same, skip to step 11.  
If, in step 6, you entered a new mailbox name, proceed to step 9.  
Im p or ta n t: As in EasyStart, you enter letters and other non-numeric char-  
If you wish to change the ID code of an existing mailbox, proceed to step 9.  
acters through the one-touch keys.  
Decide upon, and then write down, the four-digit SecureMail ID code  
(0001–9999) for this mailbox and put it in a safe place.  
5:Name  
_
:Upper  
Im p or ta n t: After you proceed with step 10, one must know this code to  
print documents sent to this mailbox.  
The word Upper” means the machine is currently set for entering only  
upper-case letters. If you press E, the machine will see it as an (not an e).  
E
Im p or ta n t: Do not use 0000 as a code.  
To change it so that pressing a one-touch key will produce a lower-case letter  
rather than an upper-case letter, press U2/a bc. The display will change to:  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit ID code for this mailbox.  
10  
11  
Press ENTER to save the mailbox information.  
5:Name  
_
:Lower  
Printing a SecureMail mailbox list  
This means pressing one-touch keys will enter lower-case letters: pressing  
will produce an r (not an R) on the display.  
R
You can easily print a list of all the SecureMail mailboxes set up on your machine.  
To print the list, just press /P ROGRAM, E, 2, ENTER.  
To switch back for upper-case entries, press U1/ABC.  
Note: To assure the security of the mailboxes, the list doesnt print the ID code.  
To enter spaces, punctuation and symbols, press U3/SYMBOL. This lets you  
enter the blue characters shown on the one-touch keypad.  
Setting SecureMail storage time  
Your fax machine can store incoming documents in SecureMail mailboxes (up to the  
limits of its memory) as long as 31 days. After that, it automatically erases the doc-  
uments. To set the storage time:  
To use the CODE function at U4/CODE to enter a wide variety of characters,  
please review the explanation on page 2.3. The vast majority of the time, you  
will probably find the ABC, a bc and SYMBOL keys to be sufficient.  
Press /P ROGRAM, E, 4, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
Note: If you make a mistake or want to erase characters entered in a previ-  
1
ous setting, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, if you want to change  
S Mail Hold Time  
just one character in the name, press  
to move the cursor leftward,  
or /P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that character. Then re-enter  
until the name is just as you want it.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter a two-digit number indicating how long, in  
number of days (01–31), you want your fax machine to keep received  
SecureMail documents. This setting affects a ll SecureMail mailboxes set up  
on your machine. Here, weve entered 09, for nine days:  
2
Press ENTER to save the mailbox information. The LCD now shows:  
7
S Mail No.  
5
S Mail Hold Time  
The machine is asking for the SecureMail boxs four-digit ID code. This is the  
code which, as we will see, one must enter in order to print a document which  
any remote SecureMail-compatible fax sends to this mailbox.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
2.48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Printing SecureMail you receive  
Sending SecureMail  
When your fax machine receives a SecureMail document from another Muratec fax  
machine, your machine will print a message alerting the person for whom the docu-  
ment is intended. Then that person (or at least someone, such as a trusted  
assistant, to whom that person has divulged his/her SecureMail mailboxs ID code)  
has a certain number of days (see Setting SecureMail storage time,” page 2.47) in  
which to print out the message before your machine automatically erases it.  
In addition to receiving SecureMail on your machine, you also can send SecureMail  
to other Muratec fax machines with SecureMail reception capabilities. (If necessary,  
consult your authorized Muratec dealer for more details, or you may call the  
Muratec Customer Support Center at [972] 364-3350.)  
Note: For you to send SecureMail to a remote fax machines SecureMail mailbox,  
three things must be true:  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The remote fax machine must be a Muratec fax machine with  
SecureMail reception capability.  
You must know the SecureMail mailboxs one-digit mailbox number.  
You must know the mailboxs four-digit ID code.  
The SecureMail mailbox must exist on the remote fax machine.  
To print a received SecureMail message:  
You must know the mailboxs one-digit SecureMail mailbox number.  
Press /P ROGRAM, E, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
To send a SecureMail transmission:  
1
Print SecureMail  
S Mail No.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
_
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the number of the mailbox whose contents  
you wish to print. Here, weve entered 5:  
2
If you wish to toggle between transmission from the feeder and transmission  
from memory, press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Print SecureMail  
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS twice and then press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
4
Press ENTER. The LCD shows:  
S Mail Tx  
3
4
S Mail No.  
_
Print SecureMail  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate one-digit number for the  
desired SecureMail mailbox in the remote machine. In this example, the num-  
ber is 8:  
5
Use the numeric keypad to enter the mailboxs four-digit ID code. Here, weve  
entered 2345:  
S Mail Tx  
Print SecureMail  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to back up, then enter the cor-  
Press ENTER.  
rect one-digit number.  
5
If youve entered the correct ID code, your fax machine will print all docu-  
ments in — and then erase them from — the mailbox.  
Press ENTER. The LCD will show:  
6
7
Enter Fax Number  
_
If youve entered an incorrect code, your fax machine will refuse to print  
the document.  
Enter the fax number either by pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-  
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad. Do n ot press START.  
2.49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
There are three possible settings for the PIN mask feature:  
What you do now depends upon when you wish the transmission to begin.  
8
9
Off — The feature isnt working. Any PIN you enter will appear on any display or  
printout which shows what you dial.  
To have it begin now, skip to step 11.  
To delay it, proceed to step 9.  
Mode 1 (the LCD calls it Mode1) — Each remote fax unit has a departmental PIN  
access code. This counts the number of telephone calls to the remote unit.  
Press COMMUNICATION OP TIONS, ENTER. The LCD will show:  
Mode 2 (the LCD calls it Mode2) — Each fax user has a departmental PIN  
access code. This counts the number of telephone calls the user has made.  
Delayed  
Note: If you select Mode 1 and you will use a one-touch or speed-dial number, you  
must store the PIN access code for the remote unit within that number.  
However, if you select Mode 2, this isnt necessary. (See Autodialing while  
using the PIN mask,” page 2.50 for further details.)  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the day and time when the SecureMail  
transmission should begin, then press ENTER.  
10  
Note: If you make a mistake, press CANCEL to erase leftward. Or, to change  
just one digit in the setting, press  
/P ROGRAM to move it rightward, to that digit. Then re-enter until  
the date and time are just as you want it.  
to move the cursor leftward, or  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission  
(see pages 2.24–2.27), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit  
within the appropriate batch box.  
Press START.  
11  
Activating the PIN mask  
If, in step 8, you chose an immediate transmission, your fax machine will begin dial-  
ing. If you chose a delayed command, the machine will display Reserved” on the  
top line of the LCD, indicating that the machine has stored the command in memory  
and will perform it later.  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, you must have preset the passcode to  
something besides 0000. If necessary, review The key to it all:  
the passcode,” page 2.44.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 8, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
J
1
Set PIN Mode  
Masking the PIN  
To prevent unauthorized long-distance calls, some office telephone systems require  
you to enter not only the phone number but also a personal identification number  
(PIN) whenever you dial an outside number beginning with 1.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. In our example  
here, weve entered 2099.  
2
If thats true for you, youll probably wish to keep that PIN confidential, so unautho-  
rized persons cant discover — and use — the PIN number. Fortunately, your faxs  
PIN mask feature makes such confidentiality possible. With the PIN mask activated,  
you can dial a fax number plus a PIN, but the PIN will not appear in a journal, error  
message printout, delayed command list or even TCR, where an unauthorized user  
might see it. The PIN, entered from the numeric keypad (it can include the * or #  
symbols, if necessary) may be up to eight characters in length.  
Set PIN Mode  
Note: If you enter an invalid passcode, the machines security feature will  
reject the attempt and abort the operation.  
Press ENTER.  
3
4
PIN Mode:  
Off  
Im p or ta n t: For this feature to work, the passcode (see page 2.44) must be some-  
Program/Enter  
thing besides 0000; and, of course, you must know the passcode.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 6.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 5.  
2.50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
To change the setting, press  
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen Mode1.”  
or /P ROGRAM repeatedly until your desired  
Press ENTER to save the PIN.  
5
6
5
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,  
indicates Invalid Number” on the LCD and then returns you to step 3.  
Now you may autodial the number as usual.  
PIN Mode:  
Mode1  
Im p or ta n t: While in PIN Mode 1, any autodialer numbers you use must include  
the PIN. Thus, this applies also to autodialer numbers used with batch  
transmission (see pages 2.24–2.27) or programmable one-touch keys  
(see pages 2.36–2.43).  
Press ENTER.  
Autodialing while using the PIN mask  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission  
(see pages 2.24–2.27), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit  
within the appropriate batch box.  
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use  
your machines autodialer. If you need to review, see pages 2.8–2.16.  
Note: If the PIN mask feature is off, you use the autodialer normally.  
If youve specified “Mode 2” — as you autodial, load the code  
If youve specified “Mode 1” — the PIN goes in  
In this mode, you dont have to add the PIN to the autodialer setting itself. Instead,  
you enter the PIN manually each time you autodial:  
In this mode, before autodialing the desired number the first time, you must add  
the PIN to its stored one-touch key or speed-dial number. Heres how:  
Perform the usual autodialing procedure for the number itself. Here, weve  
1
Make a normal autodialer entry through the entry of the call group(s).  
The LCD will show:  
pushed one-touch key  
A:  
1
Press Start  
A_  
Set PIN Number  
Press START. The machine now asks for the PIN:  
2
3
4
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode. Here, well use our  
sample passcode again.  
2
Enter PIN Number  
_
Set PIN Number  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.  
Enter PIN Number  
1057_  
Press ENTER. In our example, were setting speed-dial number 001:  
3
001:PIN Number  
_
Press START. Your machine will dial the number.  
Use the numeric keypad (including either * or #, if necessary) to enter the  
desired PIN, up to eight characters in length.  
Note: If you select either Mode 1 or Mode 2 and will be using batch transmission  
(see pages 2.24–2.27), you must store the PIN access code for the remote unit  
within the appropriate batch box.  
4
001:PIN Number  
1057_  
2.51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Dialing from the numeric keypad while using the PIN mask  
Performing batch transmission while using the PIN mask  
Note: If the PIN mask feature is off, you dial normally.  
Note: The following instructions presume you are familiar with how to set and use  
both your machines autodialer and its batch transmission feature. If you  
need to review, see pages 2.8–2.16 for more on the autodialer and/or pages  
2.24–2.27 for more on batch transmission.  
If youve specified Mode 1 — use star” power  
Enter the phone number, then press the * (“star) key and enter the PIN.  
The PIN always goes last. For example, to dial 19725550911 with a PIN of  
123456, enter 19725550911*123456:  
1
Note: If the PIN mask feature is off, you dial normally.  
If youve specified Mode 1 or Mode 2  
Press Start  
19725550911*123456  
Im p or ta n t: Any autodialer number you use with batch transmission must include  
the PIN. (To review how to include this information in an autodialer  
number, review the Mode 1 instructions under Autodialing while  
using the PIN mask,” page 2.50.)  
Before sending a batch transmission to a desired number the first time, you must  
store the PIN within its batch box. Heres how:  
Press START. The PIN disappears from the display, and your machine dials the  
desired phone number.  
2
If youve specified Mode 2 — the machine guides you  
Enter the phone number as usual.  
Perform the batch box setting until youve entered the batch box number.  
The LCD now asks for the fax number (here, were working with batch box 1):  
1
1
Press Start  
19725550911_  
1:Fax Number  
_
Press START. The LCD now shows:  
2
Enter an autodialer number, or use the numeric keypad to enter the fax num-  
ber, to which the batch transmission should go.  
2
Enter PIN Number  
_
Im p or ta n t: If youre using an autodialer number, it must contain the PIN, as  
mentioned previously.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the PIN.  
3
If youre entering a number from the numeric keypad, enter the  
fax number, followed by the * (“star) key and then the PIN.  
Enter PIN Number  
123456_  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
3
Note: If you press ENTER without entering the PIN, the fax machine beeps,  
indicates No PIN Number” on the LCD and then returns you to step 2.  
Now you can perform batch transmission to this box while the PIN mask is activated.  
Press START. Your machine will dial the number.  
4
2.52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Decide upon, and then write down, the four-digit closed network passcode  
Setting security transmission  
1
2
(0000–9999) you want to use and put it in a safe place.  
Your faxs security transmission feature provides extra assurance that your documents  
go where youre sending them. When this feature is activated and your machine sends a  
fax, the machine compares the last four digits of the dialed number to the other units  
Subscriber ID (the phone number at the top of that units transmissions; see page 1.10).  
If these digits match, your call goes through. If they dont, your machine disconnects the  
call and prints an error message telling you to check the condition of the remote unit.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 0, 9, ENTER. The LCD shows the current code:  
Set Passcode  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 4.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 3.  
Before you activate this feature, please consider:  
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —  
Indeed, some machines dont even have a Subscriber ID. So, with security trans-  
mission activated, your machine would disconnect its calls to such machines.  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired four-digit closed network passcode.  
3
4
Set Passcode  
Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with a long-distance  
or other access code, activating this feature prevents calls to that fax. (After all,  
the other faxs users wont put your codes at the end of their Subscriber IDs.)  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Note: In the following instructions, your faxs LCD abbreviates Transmission as Tx.  
Note: To turn off the closed network passcode and return to normal fax reception,  
change the code to 0000 by repeating steps 1–4 and entering 0000 in step 3.  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows the current setting:  
J
1
Security Tx:  
Off  
To set your fax machine to operate in a closed network:  
Program/Enter  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 0, ENTER. The LCD shows your faxs current setting:  
J
1
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Closed Net.:  
Off  
Program/Enter  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
2
3
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen On.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Security Tx:  
On  
Program/Enter  
To change the setting, press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
2
3
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen On.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Closed Net.:  
On  
Program/Enter  
Setting for use of a closed network  
For maximum communications security, use a closed network. This limits your  
machine to faxing to and from only other Muratec fax machines which can present”  
the proper passcode.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Setting Block J unk Fax  
Your fax machines Block J unk Fax feature lets you bar the gates against unautho-  
rized incoming faxes (junk fax) … bu t, first, please understand how this feature  
works, to determine whether it is right for you. There are four possible settings:  
Im p or ta n t: The passcode you use for closed network operation (and limiting polling  
access; see page 2.33) is n ot the same as the protection passcode.  
Once set this way, your machine will disconnect calls coming in from other  
machines.  
Off — The feature isnt activated.  
To set your fax machines closed network password:  
2.53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Mode 1 (the display calls it Mode1) — Your fax machine checks whether any  
Enter Fax Number  
01:_  
phone number in your autodialer matches the last four digits of the remote faxs  
subscriber ID (remember, thats the phone number part of the TTI). If it doesnt  
find such a match, your machine disconnects the call.  
or  
If you have not entered any numbers in the blocked numbers list, skip to step 7.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.  
Mode 2 (“Mode2”) — This mode rejects any call from a number whose last eight  
digits match any number in the blocked numbers list (well explain).  
If you wish to modify an existing entry in the blocked numbers list, press  
/P ROGRAM repeatedly until you see the number you wish to modify.  
… or …  
If you wish to enter a new number in an already-started blocked numbers  
list, press /P ROGRAM repeatedly until you find an empty position in the list  
(as in the first display in step 5).  
6
7
Mode 3 (“Mode3”) — This rejects both numbers not in the autodialer and numbers  
that are in the blocked numbers list. This lets you keep a number on your autodi-  
aler yet still block its incoming calls by putting it in the blocked numbers list.  
So, before you activate the Block J unk Fax feature, please consider:  
Not all fax machine owners enter their phone numbers in their Subscriber IDs. —  
With this feature activated, your machine would reject faxes from such machines.  
Note: To clear a number from the list, see Clearing a number from the  
blocked numbers list,” below.  
Access codes can cause confusion. — If an autodialer entry ends with long-dis-  
tance or other codes, Block J unk Fax will block out calls from those faxes (i. e.,  
those other fax users wont put your codes at the end of their Subscriber IDs).  
Use the numeric keypad to enter the last eight characters of a fax number you  
wish to block. For example, if you wish to block a fax from someone with a  
Subscriber ID of 972-555-3038, you should enter 5, 5, 5, -, 3, 0, 3, 8:  
If you do decide to go ahead with activating Block J unk Fax, heres how:  
Press /P ROGRAM, , 1, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows your faxs current setting:  
J
Enter Fax Number  
01:555-3038  
1
Block Junk Fax:Off  
Program/Enter  
To change only a specific digit of an entry, press  
to move leftward or  
/P ROGRAM to move rightward until the cursor is under the digit, then use  
the numeric keypad to enter the correct digit.  
If the setting you see is acceptable, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Press ENTER to save the setting. The display will show the next slot” in the  
blocked numbers list.  
If you do not wish to enter or change a number for this slot, proceed to step 9.  
If you do wish to enter or change a number for this slot, repeat steps 5–8.  
To change the setting, press  
setting appears. In this example, weve chosen Mode2.  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until your chosen  
8
9
2
Block Junk  
Fax:Mode2  
Press STOP . The display now asks whether you want to print the list.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
What you do next depends upon what you selected in step 1 or 2:  
3
4
If either Off or Mode1, your machine will return to standby mode.  
If either Mode2 or Mode3, proceed to step 4.  
If you do want to print the list, press ENTER and your machine will print it.  
If you dont want to print it, press STOP and your machine will return to its  
normal standby mode.  
10  
The LCD now asks whether you want to enter a number:  
Set BlockJunk Dial  
Program/Enter  
Clearing a number from the blocked numbers list  
To clear a number from the list:  
If you wish to enter or modify a number, press ENTER and proceed to step 5.  
Otherwise, press /P ROGRAM and skip to step 10.  
Press /P ROGRAM,  
J
, 1, 2, ENTER.  
1
If your Block J unk Fax setting is either Mode2 or Mode3, skip to step 3.  
Depending on whether you already have entered at least one number into the  
blocked numbers list, the display shows one of the following:  
5
2.54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Entering or modifying a department code  
Your machine can hold up to 100 separate department codes.  
Block Junk Fax:Off  
Program/Enter  
Note: To clear a department code, see Clearing a department code,” below.  
To enter or modify a department code:  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM until you see your preference, Mode2 or Mode3.  
2
3
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 2, ENTER. Depending upon whether youve already  
entered a department code, the LCD shows:  
1
Press ENTER, ENTER. The display shows:  
Enter Dept. Code  
001:_  
Select Department  
No  
or  
Note: If department code operation is protected (see page 2.55), the fax will  
beep briefly and then return to standby mode. You will have to turn  
off the protection first, then repeat this step.  
If this is the number you wish to clear, skip to step 5.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 4.  
If you want to enter or modify the first code (001), skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
Press /P ROGRAM repeatedly until you see the number you wish to clear.  
4
5
Press /P ROGRAM repeatedly until you see the code in which you wish to  
make either a first entry or a modification. Then press ENTER.  
Press CANCEL to clear the number.  
To clear another number from the blocked numbers list, repeat steps 4–5.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 6.  
2
3
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit department code, 0000–9999.  
Here, weve entered 1555:  
Press STOP . The display now asks whether you want to print the blocked  
numbers list.  
6
Enter Dept. Code  
001:1555  
To change only one digit, repeatedly press  
to move rightward until the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric  
keypad to enter the correct digit.  
to move leftward or  
/P ROGRAM  
If you do want to print the list, press ENTER and your machine will print it.  
Otherwise, press STOP to return your machine to its normal standby mode.  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
4
Using department codes  
You can keep track of how your machine is used through its department code feature.  
When the department code setting is activated, the machine reminds each user to  
enter his/her department code before sending or polling a document. The Activity  
J ournal then keeps track of fax transactions by department.  
To enter or modify another department code, repeat steps 2–4.  
To finish entering department codes, press STOP to return to standby mode.  
Clearing a department code  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 2, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
After you turn on this setting, assign specific code numbers to your offices fax users  
and tell them to enter the codes before proceeding with fax jobs.  
Select Department  
No  
Note: Please note that using this setting blocks access to the fax machine.  
Note: If department code operation is protected (see below), the fax will beep  
briefly and then return to standby mode. You will have to turn off the  
protection first, then repeat this step.  
If this is the code you wish to clear, skip to step 3.  
Otherwise, proceed to step 2.  
2.55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Press /P ROGRAM repeatedly until you see the code you wish to clear.  
2
3
Press CANCEL.  
To clear another department code, repeat steps 2–3.  
To finish clearing department codes, press STOP to return to standby mode.  
Dept. Protect: Off  
Program/Enter  
Activating (or turning off) the department code setting  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 3, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Dept. On/Off: Off  
Program/Enter  
Note: If department code operation is protected (see next item), the fax will  
beep briefly and then return to standby mode. You will have to turn  
off the protection first, then repeat this step.  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until you see the setting you want.  
2
3
Dept. On/Off: On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER.  
Activating (or turning off) department code protection  
Im p or ta n t: This feature will work only if youve set the passcode (see page 2.44).  
Press /P ROGRAM, M, 1, ENTER. The LCD shows:  
1
Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit passcode:  
2
Set. Dept. Protect  
To change only one digit, repeatedly press  
to move leftward or  
/P ROGRAM  
to move rightward until the cursor is under the digit, then use the numeric  
keypad to enter the correct digit.  
Press ENTER.  
3
2.56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Beyond the basics  
Press  
or /P ROGRAM once or twice until you see the setting you want.  
4
5
Dept. Protect: On  
Program/Enter  
Press ENTER to save the setting.  
Sending a fax using a department code  
Note: For this operation to work, two things must be true:  
The four-digit department code must exist on your fax machine.  
You must know the department code.  
Insert the document.  
1
2
3
Adjust resolution and contrast if necessary.  
If you want to toggle between transmission from the feeder or from memory,  
press MEMORY TRANSMIT.  
Enter the fax number by either pressing a one-touch key, entering a speed-  
dial number or dialing from the numeric keypad.  
4
5
Press START.  
Enter Dept. Code  
_
Use the numeric keypad to enter the appropriate four-digit department code.  
In this example, weve entered 1234:  
6
7
Enter Dept. Code  
1234_  
Press START again.  
2.57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Now, heres how  
to care for  
your machine.  
Also, well suggest  
procedures to try  
in case of trouble.  
Finally, the Glossary  
will explain fax terms  
you may encounter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Whats inside this section  
Clearing paper jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2  
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4  
Figuring out communications problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Caring for your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11  
Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17  
Were on-line to help you!  
Before you try calling for help, first please give the Muratec Information  
System a try.  
The Muratec Information System is available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days  
a week. You can use your fax machine to call this fax-on-demand” system  
and receive printouts of information, such as the most common questions  
asked about your machine. Often, this is the fastest way to find out the  
answer to any question you may have. And its a free call!  
To use the Muratec Information System:  
On your fax machine, obtain a dial tone by pressing MONITOR/CALL. (If  
youre in a noisy area and have an optional handset attached to your  
machine, you may wish simply to lift the handset instead.)  
1
Call 1-800-215-1698.  
2
3
Follow the voice instructions youll receive from the system.  
3.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Clearing paper jams  
We designed your fax machine to work reliably for years. However, you may occa-  
sionally experience one type or another of paper jam. Heres what to do.  
If a printout jams  
To clear a printout (either a received fax or a copy) jammed inside your fax  
machine:  
If an original document jams  
Open the scanner cover by hold-  
ing the scanner cover release.  
1
Open your fax machines printer  
cover by pressing the printer  
cover release button.  
1
Im p or ta n t: Hold the cover  
open. It wont stay  
open by itself.  
Gently pull the jammed printout up and out. The printout may be jammed  
either within the fax (left, below), or in the output tray (right, below).  
2
Lift the original document from  
your fax machine.  
2
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped down  
securely. Then re-try the transmission.  
3
Note: If the original document has become wrinkled or torn, dont re-send it.  
Gently close the printer cover, press-  
ing firmly on both sides of the printer  
cover until you hear it click.  
3
3.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
To clear a printout jammed at the paper cassette:  
To clear a printout jammed at the multipurpose tray:  
Pull forward on the paper cas-  
sette to open it.  
Remove the paper stack from  
the tray.  
1
1
Carefully remove the jammed  
paper(s) from the machines  
rollers, as shown.  
Carefully remove the jammed  
paper from the machine,  
as shown.  
2
2
Push the paper cassette back  
3
Reload the paper stack into  
the tray.  
3
into its normal position within  
the machine.  
Note: Be sure not to reload any  
sheets which may have  
become crinkled or torn  
during either the jam  
itself or your removal of  
the jammed paper.  
Open your fax machines printer  
cover by pressing the printer  
cover release button.  
4
Gently close the printer cover, press-  
ing firmly on both sides of the printer  
cover until you hear it click.  
5
3.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Print quality problems  
If your machines printouts (received faxes or copies) develop quality problems, check  
the following descriptions and, when you find the one which appears to be like yours,  
try the suggested solutions. If they dont work, they please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer or call Muratec Customer Support center at (972) 364-3350.  
Printouts are too dark  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the toner cartridge for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Pages are blank  
The drum cartridge or toner cartridge may not be  
installed correctly.  
Install each cartridge correctly.  
The toner cartridge may be out of, or very low in, toner.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the toner cartridge for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
Printouts have a blurred background  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the toner cartridge for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Pages are black  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the toner cartridge for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
Your fax machines printer may be due for a service check.  
Call your dealer or contact Muratec Customer Support.  
Printouts are of uneven density  
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the  
toner cartridge.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Printouts are too light  
The toner cartridge may be out of, or very low in, toner.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
The drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the drum cartridge for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
The toner cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the toner cartridge for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.  
3.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Printouts have irregularities  
Printouts have toner smudges  
The paper youre using may have absorbed moisture, per-  
haps due either to high humidity or water having been  
spilled on the paper supply at some point. Toner will not  
adhere well to paper at the locations where the paper has  
been wet.  
The toner may be unevenly distributed inside the  
toner cartridge.  
Remove the toner cartridge and shake it a few times to  
redistribute the toner inside. If the problem persists, replace  
the cartridge.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ACDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Replace the paper with dry paper and try printing again.  
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the cartridges for damage. If the problem  
persists, replace either or both of the cartridges as indicated.  
If you find smudges on the back of the printouts, the trans-  
port roller may be dirty.  
Your machine normally cleans the transport roller auto-  
matically. If other solutions fail, please contact your  
authorized Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer  
Support Center at (972) 364-3350.  
Printouts have white and/or black lines  
The toner cartridge or drum cartridge may be defective.  
Remove and check the cartridges for damage.  
If the problem persists, replace either or both of the car-  
tridges as indicated.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
The charger may be dirty.  
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.  
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer or call Muratec Customer Support.  
Printouts have white spots  
The charger may be dirty.  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Your machine normally cleans the charger automatically.  
If other solutions fail, please contact your authorized  
Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer Support  
Center at (972) 364-3350.  
3.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Figuring out communications problems  
Occasionally during transmissions, your fax machine will detect a problem with the  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
phone line or will encounter some other trouble in transmission or reception. When  
it does, it will alert you with an alarm. You can further identify the problem with  
LCD messages, printed check messages and error reports. In the next few pages, well  
tell you more about these troubleshooting methods.  
Too Many Characters You attempted to enter too many numbers or  
other characters in the current operation. Press  
CANCEL to delete the extra characters, then try  
again. You may wish to review the operations  
appropriate instructions.  
Invalid Number  
You pressed a key which has no function during  
the current operation.  
Alarm  
Your fax machine will sound the alarm tone — a series of short beeps — if it suffers  
either of these two problems:  
No Number Stored  
You selected an autodialer number for which  
there is no phone number programmed. Either  
choose another autodialer number or dial a  
phone number directly from the numeric keypad.  
It has trouble transmitting or receiving.  
It runs out of paper.  
Communication Error A communication error disrupted the reception  
or transmission. If you were transmitting, press  
ENTER to clear the error message and then re-try  
the transmission. If you were receiving a fax, try  
to contact the other person and have him/ her re-  
try the transmission. (The problem may be  
LCD error messages  
What you see on the LCD  
Reset Document  
What it means/What to do  
Your document wasnt inserted correctly, or the  
fax to which youre sending cant handle the doc-  
uments page length. Reset the page and try  
again.  
entirely with his/her machine, phone line, etc.)  
Close Scanner Cover The scanner cover is open. Close it.  
Close Top Cover  
The printer cover is open. Close it.  
Insert Document  
Hang Up Phone  
There was no document in the document feeder  
when you tried to send a fax or make a copy.  
Place a document in the feeder and try again.  
Please Remove Paper A paper jam has occurred. Remove the jammed  
paper (review pages 3.2–3.3 if necessary).  
The optional handset is off-hook. Hang it up,  
making sure the upper part of the handset  
presses down on the hook” button.  
No Report  
You requested an activity journal or confirma-  
tion report, but your machine has no record of  
any fax jobs having occurred.  
Call For Service  
The scanner lamp is dim or inoperable. Make  
repeated copies to help evaporate any internal  
moisture. If that doesnt resolve the problem, call  
your authorized Muratec dealer or Muratec  
Customer Support.  
Enter No.(0-99)  
You entered a number greater than 99 while  
trying to print a database polling document.  
Your machine can store 100 files, numbered  
0–99, for database polling. Determine the files  
correct number and re-enter it.  
3.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
Enter No.(0-32)  
You tried to enter a call group number greater  
than 32. Your machine can maintain 32 call  
groups, numbered 1–32 (call group 0 covers all  
the groups). Determine the correct call group  
and re-enter its identifier number.  
Enter No.(1-99)  
You tried to request 0” copies from your fax,  
which can create 1–99 copies of a document.  
Select the correct quantity and re-enter it.  
No Document Stored  
No Command  
You tried to print a document from memory, but  
your fax machine had none stored.  
You pressed REVIEW COMMANDS to review upcom-  
ing commands, but your fax machine had none  
stored.  
Invalid I.D. Code  
Memory Overflow  
The SecureMail passcode you entered isnt  
valid. Try re-entering your SecureMail passcode.  
During transmission (or copying), you tried to enter  
more pages into memory than your fax could store.  
Press START (or COPY) to tell your fax to keep as many  
pages in memory as possible, or press CANCEL to  
delete from memory all pages stored during this  
operation (but not previous operations).  
All Commands In Use Your fax machine has all of its 99 possible  
delayed commands (an automatic redialing  
counts as one) stored in memory and cannot  
accept another. Delete an existing command by  
using REVIEW COMMANDS, or wait until your fax  
has completed one of the delayed commands.  
Check # of Pages  
You placed fewer pages into the document  
feeder than you indicated in your page-number-  
ing user setting (see page 2.35). Carefully  
recount the pages in your document, then re-try  
the transmission, being sure to enter the correct  
number of pages if you use the page-numbering  
function.  
Please Supply Toner The toner cartridge is empty. Replace it.  
Please Replace Drum Your drum cartridge no longer functions. Please  
replace it, being sure to reset the drum counter  
when you do so (see page 1.7).  
3.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
What you see on the LCD  
What it means/What to do  
Check Paper Size  
The multipurpose trays paper size setting (see  
page 1.8) doesnt conform to the paper actually  
in the tray. Either change the setting or change  
the paper so that each is the same as the other.  
No Passcode  
You tried to protect an operation or department  
code but theres no protection passcode stored in  
your fax machine. Store a protection passcode in  
your machine, then re-try protecting the opera-  
tion or department code.  
Check Rx Paper  
Both the multipurpose tray and paper cassette  
are out of paper. Add paper to the tray and/ or  
the cassette.  
No PIN Number  
No Dept. Code  
You selected Mode1” in the PIN mask feature  
and tried to call an autodialer number in  
which no PIN has been entered. Enter a PIN, then  
try again.  
Check Tray Paper  
The multipurpose tray is out of paper. Add  
paper to the tray.  
You tried to turn on the department code setting  
but there are no department codes stored in  
your fax machine. Store at least one department  
code, then try again.  
Check Cassette Paper The paper cassette is out of paper. Add paper to  
the cassette.  
. . . or . . .  
The paper cassette is open. Close it.  
Protect Doc. Stored A received document was in your faxs memory  
when you tried to turn off security reception or  
erase the protection passcode. Print the received  
document from your faxs memory, then re-try  
the desired operation.  
Too Many Locations  
You tried to enter too many numbers for a  
broadcast. You can enter up to 10 one-touch or  
speed-dial numbers and numbers entered  
through the numeric keypad. Press CANCEL to  
delete the extra numbers and try again.  
Please Call Service The printer unit of your machine has become  
inoperable. Call your authorized Muratec dealer  
Scanner In Use  
Feeder In Use  
Printer In Use  
Polling In Use  
The command youre trying to enter requires the  
use of the scanner, which is already in use. Wait  
for the fax to complete the scan, then try again.  
or Muratec Customer Support.  
The command youre trying to enter requires the  
use of the feeder, which is already in use. Wait for  
the fax to stop using the feeder, then try again.  
The command youre trying to enter requires the  
use of the printer, which is already in use. Wait  
for the fax to finish printing, then try again.  
You tried to store the polling document in your  
fax, where one already had been stored. Wait  
for the fax to complete the polling operation, then  
try again.  
Document Stored  
Invalid Passcode  
You tried to erase a batch box which contains at  
least one document. Erase the document(s), then  
try again.  
The protection passcode you entered isnt valid.  
Repeat the operation, entering the correct protec-  
tion passcode.  
3.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Specific errors  
Lets quickly summarize the error codes you may see on an error report:  
Errors  
When sending faxes, your machine occasionally will run into communications errors.  
These can be caused by anything from lightning to telephone line interference.  
(These same factors cause the static, or line noise, you sometimes hear on phone  
calls.) They also can be caused by problems with the fax machine at the other end of  
the line.  
Dialing errors  
D.0.1, The remote unit didnt respond, the call couldnt be completed or STOP was  
D.0.3, pressed during dialing. Re-try the call. If your machine repeats the message,  
D.0.7, call the remote fax units operator and verify that unit is operating properly.  
D.0.8  
Often, simply trying your call again is all thats necessary. However, if the problem  
persists regularly, call your local telephone company for help. If that call doesnt help  
and the problem persists regularly, call your authorized Muratec dealer or call the  
Muratec Customer Support Center at (972) 364-3350.  
Reception errors  
R.1.1 The calling fax machine didnt respond to your fax machine. This can hap-  
pen if someone dials a wrong number or if the remote machine restricts  
access through use of a passcode.  
Error reports  
When an error occurs, your fax machine prints an error report. Each fax error  
report lists an error message which includes:  
R.1.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and  
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary, pages 3.17–3.20) fax communica-  
tion, the industry standard since the early 1980s.  
A possible solution to the problem  
The sending location (if the remote fax stores a Location ID of its own)  
The result — which is a special error code.  
A sample of the documents first page.  
R.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the receiving fax machine.  
R.1.5 The fax machine didnt detect the silence at the end of the call for receiving  
an RCR.  
R.2.1 A compatibility error (junk fax detection) occurred.  
Kinds of error codes  
The error code listed in the Result” column of the error report indicates the specific  
problem encountered:  
R.2.3 Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Call some-  
one at the remote machine.  
R.3.1 The sending fax machine detected too many errors from the receiving  
fax machine.  
Dcodes — Occur while dialing  
Rcodes — Occur during reception  
Tcodes — Occur during transmission  
R.3.3 The sending fax machine is incompatible or had a document feeder problem  
during transmission.  
R.3.4 Poor phone line conditions may have prevented your fax machine from prop-  
erly printing some or all of the pages it received.  
R.3.5 Poor line conditions prevented reception.  
R.4.2 Either the line disconnected before transmission or the transmitting fax  
machine needs maintenance.  
R.4.4 The fax machine has reached its memory capacity.  
R.5.1, ECM reception failed (perhaps due to line noise).  
R.5.2,  
R.5.3  
R.8.1 A compatibility error occurred. (F-150 only.)  
R.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing. (F-150 only.)  
R.8.11 The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal. (F-150 only.)  
3.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Transmission errors  
Check Message” printouts  
When a fax call goes awry and your machine detects an error, it produces an error  
printout headed by the words Check Message.” This printout lists the following  
information about the transmission:  
T.1.1 The remote fax machine didnt respond to your machine. Call someone at the  
remote machine.  
T.1.4 Someone pressed STOP at the remote unit in the middle of the handshake  
(the very first part of the fax communication, when the two units agree” on  
the settings theyll share).  
The resulting error code  
A communications error message (see What error messages can mean,” below)  
T.2.1 Either the phone line disconnected during transmission or fax communica-  
The phone number (or, perhaps, TTI) of the fax machine with which your  
machine had attempted to communicate.  
tion became impossible due to bad phone line conditions. Re-try the call.  
T.2.2 The two fax machines were incompatible. Your fax machine sends and  
receives only ITU-T Group 3 (see Glossary,” page 3.17) fax communication,  
the industry standard since the early 1980s.  
What error messages can mean  
The error messages on Check Message printouts can mean a variety of things.  
Heres a brief summary:  
T.2.3 Bad phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Conditions  
can change rapidly, so re-try the call later.  
Er r or m essa ge  
P ossible m ea n in gs  
T.3.2 The fax machine didnt detect the silence indicating the call had ended.  
T.4.2 After transmission began, poor line conditions developed. Re-try the call.  
T.4.4 Poor line conditions prevented transmission. Re-try the call.  
Check condition of  
remote fax  
• Remote machine malfunctioned  
• No handshake” signals from remote fax  
• Wrong phone number reached  
T.5.1, ECM transmission failed (perhaps due to line noise). Conditions can change  
T.5.2, rapidly, so re-try the call later.  
Repeat transmission  
Poor phone line conditions  
• No handshake” signals from remote fax  
• Document misfeed or miscount  
• Unable to reach remote machine after  
attempting specified number of redial tries  
T.5.3  
T.8.1 A compatibility error occurred. (F-150 only.)  
T.8.10 Line noise or other problems prevented line probing. (F-150 only.)  
T.8.11 The remote fax machine didnt complete the equalizer training phase.  
Line is busy  
• Remote machines line was busy  
• Remote machines line didnt answer  
(F-150 only.)  
Check received documents  
• Remote confirmation signal not received  
from remote fax  
Poor line conditions caused a poor image  
Memory full  
• Remote faxs memory capacity exceeded  
• Stored phone number failed to dial properly  
Dialing number is not set  
Stopped  
• Someone pressed STOP at the remote fax  
in the middle of the handshake”  
3.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Caring for your fax machine  
With proper installation and a little maintenance, your fax machine should give you  
dependable service for years to come.  
Keep the air vents clean  
As youll recall from page 1.6, you shouldnt cover your machine or it may overheat.  
However, dust can build up and become a sort of cover.” You already know not to  
locate your machine in a dusty area, but, any object out in the open obviously will  
gather dust as time passes.  
Although it requires little day-to-day care, you can take these simple precautions to  
keep it in top form:  
Alw a ys make sure your fax machine is installed according to our specifications,  
including using an electrical surge suppressor. (If necessary, review Pick an  
installation spot before going ahead,” page 1.6.)  
So, be sure to clea n you r m a ch in es a ir ven ts p er iod ica lly. When you do, use a  
vacuum cleaner or brush. (Do n ot wipe the air vents with a damp cloth!)  
Alw a ys use good, copier-quality paper.  
The air vents are located on the left side of the machine (as viewed from in front;  
the drawing below is a view from the machines left rear):  
Alw a ys clean your fax machine as needed (see Cleaning tips,” below).  
Never install your fax machine where it can overheat, gather dust or get  
splashed by any liquids (even water).  
Cleaning tips  
Here are some things to keep in mind about cleaning your fax machine:  
Do clean it! Dust and dirt, especially around the fax machines air vents (see  
right column) can shorten your machines life.  
Alw a ys unplug the fax machine before you clean it.  
Never spr a y a n y clea n er DIRECTLY on to you r fa x m a ch in e. The drifting  
spray could damage components inside.  
Never tr y to clea n SEALED a r ea s in sid e you r fa x m a ch in e. Theyre sealed for  
a purpose: to protect your safety and the machine!  
This tip applies only to cleaning external surfaces, such as the cover and handset  
use a mild cleaning solution sprayed onto a lint-free towel or cloth.  
Alw a ys use a lint-free cloth (or swabs) moistened with alcohol to wipe — gently  
— components inside your machine. (See also the next step.)  
In areas you cant reach with swabs, a lw a ys use dry, dust-free compressed air to  
gently blow away dust and other material.  
3.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
If you have unsatisfactory printout quality  
Corrective cleaning  
Your machine automatically cleans its charger and transport roller, two items  
which are very important to printout quality. So, if you notice poor printout quality  
(whether on received faxes or on copies), it may mean that your machine requires  
service. Review Print quality problems” (pages 3.4–3.5), and see whether any of the  
proposed solutions helps your machine. If none does, please call your authorized  
Muratec dealer or call the Muratec Customer Support Center at (972) 364-3350.  
Here are some simple cleaning procedures for keeping your fax machine operating  
smoothly. Use each as the need arises.  
Curing frequent jams in the document feeder  
If youre having trouble with getting your original documents to feed properly, try  
this procedure:  
Turn off your fax machine.  
1
2
Get two soft, lint-free cloths and moisten them as follows:  
One with a cleaner suitable for use on platen/rubber rollers  
The other with isopropyl alcohol  
Open the scanner cover by holding the  
scanner cover release.  
3
4
Im p or ta n t: You must hold the cover  
open. It wont stay open  
by itself.  
Use the cloth with the  
rollers cleaner to clean  
the face of the rollers.  
Rotate the rollers  
by hand to allow  
cleaning of the  
entire roller surface.  
Use the cloth with the  
isopropyl alcohol to clean  
the contact glass.  
5
6
Gently close the scanner cover, making sure both sides are snapped  
down securely.  
3.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Common questions  
Q: Can I use a dust cover on my fax machine?  
A: No! A dust cover blocks air circulation, which could cause your machine to  
Were on-line to help you!  
Before you try calling for help, first please give the Muratec Information  
overheat. (See page 1.6 for other guidelines.)  
System a try.  
The Muratec Information System is available to you 24 hours a day, 7 days  
a week. You can use your fax machine to call this fax-on-demand” system  
and receive printouts of information, such as the most common questions  
asked about your machine. Often, this is the fastest way to find out the  
answer to any question you may have. And its a free call!  
Sending faxes  
Q: Sometimes, I try to send a fax while using either the (optional) handset or the  
MONITOR/CALL feature. But, when the other side answers, I hear a horrible  
screeching sound, so I hang up. Whats happening?  
To use the Muratec Information System:  
A: That was the other fax machine trying to say Hello” to your machine! Youll  
hear sounds like that any time you call a fax machine which is set to answer  
automatically (as when you set your machine to Fax Ready mode). Its by using  
these tones that fax machines send faxes over ordinary phone lines. So, next  
time you hear such tones, press START (and, if youre using an optional handset,  
hang up) to send a fax.  
On your fax machine, obtain a dial tone by pressing MONITOR/CALL. (If  
youre in a noisy area and have an optional handset attached to your  
machine, you may wish simply to lift the handset instead.)  
1
Call 1-800-215-1698.  
2
3
Follow the voice instructions youll receive from the system.  
Q: I just sent a fax. However, the number that appeared in my machines display  
during the transmission wasnt the number I dialed. Why?  
A: That number you saw is programmed into the remote fax machine by the user.  
Some users (perhaps for privacys sake?) prefer different numbers to appear  
than the ones theyre really using; and, frankly, some people take over others  
already-programmed fax machines and dont know how to change the originally  
set number!  
General questions  
Q: Where do I add ink or toner to make my fax machines printouts darker?  
A: You cant adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout, but you can adjust  
the darkness of a copy (or copies) or of a transmission. Insert a document and  
press CONTRAST repeatedly to adjust the contrast setting. Dark” prints at the  
darkest setting. The machine will reset automatically to normal contrast after  
the copying or sending.  
Q: Can I transmit and receive at the same time?  
A: No. Use the call request feature (see pages 2.34–2.35) to ask the person at the  
remote fax machine if he or she wants to transmit or receive after your fax  
communication is complete.  
Note: You cant adjust the darkness of an incoming fax printout.  
Q: When I unplug my machine or if the power goes off, will I lose the information  
Ive stored — such as my TTI, autodialer entries, the time and date, etc. — and  
have to re-enter them?  
Q: Do I have to dial a 1 for a long-distance call?  
A: Yes. Dialing a fax number is just like dialing any other phone number, so be  
sure to include any special long-distance codes or dialing pauses when dialing.  
Also, remember to include them when you set your autodialer numbers.  
A: No. Theres a special battery built into your fax machine which protects user  
settings for several days if power fails or if you decide to move your machine.  
However, while the battery will last for years, we do advise you to restore  
power to the machine as soon as possible.  
3.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Q: How do I send a fax to an overseas telephone number?  
Q: I inserted a document in the feeder and dialed a fax number, but my machine  
didnt transmit the document; instead, ** Auto Redial **now appears on  
my LCD. What does this mean?  
A: Dialing requirements for international calls may vary depending on your local  
telephone companys requirements. For most international calls, call 011, then  
the appropriate country code, city code and phone number. (You may find coun-  
try and city codes in the front section of your telephone directory.)  
A: The remote fax machine was busy, so your machine will try the call again,  
automatically. As long as it hasnt stored more than 99 delayed commands  
(counting automatic redials), your machine should still accept commands from  
you. If it has exceeded this quantity and will accept no more commands, try can-  
celling one of the delayed commands (see pages 2.21–2.23). If the machine still  
wont cooperate, keep cancelling commands until it does.  
Q: Can I transmit if my fax machine runs out of paper?  
A: Yes; however, confirmation reports (see page 2.30) arent available when you  
transmit without recording paper in your fax machine.  
Q: The specifications (page AI.1) list an average per-page transmission time, but  
Q: Can I transmit a document thats extra long?  
when I transmit a page it can take much longer. Why?  
A: Yes, if the receiving fax machine is equipped to handle long documents. Many  
machines have a special setting which allows them to receive documents that  
exceed the normal length.  
A: We base this specification on transmission of an industry-standard test docu-  
ment called ITU-T Test Document 1 (sometimes also called the Slerexe letter).  
Fax manufacturers use this method to test transmission speeds. However:  
Q: Can I transmit a page from a newspaper?  
The pages you send may be darker, or otherwise contain more information,  
than ITU-T Test Document 1.  
A: No. A newspaper page can jam in your document feeder. First, use a copying  
machine to make an appropriately sized copy of the material in the newspaper  
page, then transmit the copy.  
The transmission time measured for test documents doesnt include hand-  
shake time the time during which two fax machines introduce”  
themselves to each other and agree on” the parameters of the call.  
Q: Can I transmit a page with correction fluid on it?  
The specification time is based on the use of normal resolution mode. You  
may be using fine, superfine or grayscale transmission, each of which takes  
longer than normal mode.  
A: Yes, if the fluid is completely dry before you begin transmission.  
Q: How can I be sure my fax was received?  
A: Set your machine to print a confirmation report after each transmission (see  
page 2.30).  
Reports  
Q: I dont want to install a dedicated phone line for my fax machine, so Ive con-  
nected the machine to a PBX phone system. When I get a fax call, all the phones  
ring! How do I prevent this?  
Q: I called the number 011-555-555-1212, but not all of the digits appear on my  
transmit confirmation report (TCR). Why didnt the whole number appear? How  
can I be sure my document went to the right location?  
A: Call your PBX manufacturer or telephone company for assistance. Either may  
A: The numbers you enter using the fax keypad are temporarily stored in a mem-  
ory buffer; and its only the last part of the phone number that the buffer  
remembers.” An easy way to avoid getting incomplete telephone numbers on  
your printouts is to store your most frequently used numbers as one-touch keys  
or speed-dial numbers. These autodialer numbers will appear in their entirety  
on your TCR.  
be able to convert one of the PBX lines for use only by your fax machine.  
Q: Sometimes when I dial a fax call by using either the (optional) handset or  
MONITOR/CALL, I dont hear the fax receiving tones from the other machine.  
Am I doing something wrong?  
A: When this happens, try pressing START (and then hanging up the optional  
handset if youre using it), as usual. Its possible youre calling an older, non-  
standard fax machine that doesnt emit answering tones. Even a few Group 3  
faxes (see Glossary,” page 3.17) on the market sound a sending tone but dont  
sound a receiving tone. After you transmit, call the person at the other fax  
machine to see if he/she got your document.  
3.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Receiving faxes  
Q: My fax never answers. Whats wrong?  
Polling  
Q: Whats the purpose of polling?  
A: Check to make sure your fax machine is properly connected to a working AC  
power outlet and phone jack (see pages 1.6–1.8). If youre using a second phone  
with your machine, make sure its connected properly (page 1.9).  
A: Polling lets you automatically pull” a document from another fax machines  
document feeder. You can poll whenever you need to retrieve information and  
dont want the source to pay for the phone call. With polling, you pay for the  
call and get the information you need.  
Q: Sometimes when I answer my machine with the optional handset, I hear a  
beeping sound that repeats every few seconds. Is this a fax?  
A: Yes. When you hear such fax tones, someone is trying to send you a fax. Next  
How your fax machine works  
The concept of how a fax machine works is simple. Heres a simple analogy. Lets  
say you want to mail a gift to a friend:  
time, press START and hang up the handset. Your fax will receive the message.  
Q: Does my fax machine has to be plugged in (i. e., into the AC power) just to  
receive a message?  
You take the item, wrap it and send it.  
A: Yes. Your phone will ring if the phone line is connected, but you cant receive a  
fax unless your fax machine is plugged into both the phone jack and the AC  
power jack. Make sure your fax machine is always plugged in so you never  
miss an important fax message.  
Days later, your friend receives the package, unwraps it and uses it.  
Now, lets apply that to fax communication.  
You put a page into your fax machines feeder and call a fax number. Your machine  
makes a satisfactory connection with the other machine, and then …  
Q: Can I receive a fax if Im using the phone on my machine?  
A: You can receive a fax from the person to whom youre talking. When that per-  
son has a document ready in his/her machines feeder, press START. However,  
like any regular one-line phone, your fax machine can handle only one call at a  
time. The OneLine + feature (see pages 2.33–2.34) lets you receive calls on up  
to two phone numbers if your telephone company has installed the appropriate  
DRD service, but you can use only one number at a time.  
An image scanner in your fax machine examines the information on the page.  
Thats how your machine takes the document.  
Your fax machine translates the scanned information into a numeric code and  
compresses the code for the fastest possible transmission speed.  
Thats how your machine wraps the document.  
Finally, your fax machine sends the compressed code.  
Thats how your machine sends the document.  
On the other end of the line …  
The remote fax machine receives the code.  
The remote fax machine uncompresses and deciphers the code, turning it into a  
representation of the scan your machine made.  
Thats how your machine unwraps the document.  
The remote fax machine prints the representation.  
Now, the recipient can use the document.  
and thats how fax works!  
The only difference between a regular telephone call and a fax call is the content of  
the transmission:  
On a regular call, your telephone sends your voice.  
On a fax call, your fax machine sends a coded image.  
3.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
The way fax machines work is regulated closely by international standards applied  
by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU), an agency of the United  
Nations. These standards ensure the compatibility of your fax machine with mil-  
lions of other fax machines worldwide. However, they also limit the way you can use  
your machine with a second telephone.  
Nonetheless, this is a small price to pay — for the ability to send documents just  
about anywhere on earth!  
3.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Glossary  
This glossary contains terms and words you may encounter when discussing or  
reading about fax machines and fax communications. Please use these definitions  
for reference only. Of course, all information is subject to change without notice.  
Ca ll-w a itin g ser vice — An optional telephone company service that identifies  
when another party is calling while one is already on the phone. Call-waiting sig-  
nals often cause interruption of fax transmission or reception.  
CCITT — See ITU-T  
.
A4, B4, A3 — Standard stationery sizes defined by the International Standards  
Organization, an agency of the United Nations. See also Paper sizes.  
CCD, CIS — Charged coupled device, contact image sensor. Two types of scanning  
mechanisms used in some Muratec fax machines. The CCD reads” fluorescent light  
bouncing off a document. The CIS uses a flat bar of light-emitting diodes (LEDs).  
Au tod ia lin g Enables user to store preprogrammed telephone numbers in the  
units memory. Storage capability varies from unit to unit.  
Com p a tibility — The term compatible” describes the ability of separate things to  
function together. Your Muratec fax machine features ITU-T Group 3 compatibility,  
the modern standard for worldwide communication.  
Au tom a tic fa llba ck — The ability of a fax machine, when communicating with  
another fax which is communicating at a slower rate, to slow down (fall back) to  
the other units speed.  
Con fid en tia l tr a n sm ission — See SecureMail.  
Con fir m a tion r ep or t — See RCR and TCR.  
Au tom a tic r ed u ction — Many Muratec fax machines will automatically reduce  
documents being transmitted to accommodate the effective printing width of the  
receiving unit. This allows, for example, a fax machine with a 10scanning width to  
send an image 10wide to a unit with an 8.5print width; the receiving fax  
machine will receive a reduced-size printout of the complete image.  
Con tin u ou s p ollin g — See Polling.  
Cop y m od e — Lets one use a fax machine as a convenience copier.  
Cover p a ge (a u tom a tic) — A small, user-created message; can be the first page of  
every transmission.  
Bit — The smallest unit of information in a computer. Contraction of binary digit.”  
Some Muratec fax machines, which are themselves computers dedicated” to  
telecommunications, allow users to change bits of information to provide or cancel  
features through software settings.  
Da ta ba se p ollin g — See Polling.  
Da ta com p r ession — Used in digital fax machines to speed transmission. See also  
Digital fax, MH and MSE, SMSE.  
Bits p er secon d — See bps.  
Dela yed com m a n d — Transmission or polling operation set by the user to occur  
later, automatically, at a predetermined time. Great for reducing costs by making  
fax calls during times, such as late at night or on weekends, when telephone costs  
are lowest.  
Bla ck d en sity — Also called black coverage. The amount of non-white area on a  
page. For example, most regular office correspondence has a black density well  
under 10%, due to the presence of margins, spaces between words, spaces between  
lines and paragraphs and even spaces within letters (such as e and o). However,  
drawings and photographs have a much higher black density, sometimes approach-  
ing 100%. The higher a pages black density, the more slowly a fax machine can  
send it.  
Digita l — Using the binary system — i. e., either 0 or 1 to describe everything,  
so that 0 means off and 1 means on; digital fax machines convert the graphic image  
of your document into a series of zeros and ones by using the binary system of  
transmission to encode black and white occurrences. This increases transmission  
speed by passing over white spaces. See also White-line skip.  
bp s — Bits per second. Used to express the speed of transmission of data. Because  
fax transmission treats a document as a graphic image rather than as a series of  
alphabetic and numeric characters, bps does not correspond to the number of char-  
acters transmitted per second.  
Digita l fa x — Unlike analog systems that scan every portion of a document, digital  
fax machines survey a documents overall picture content. Digital fax machines  
scan a line and convert the information into a binary code of zeros and ones. The fax  
machine takes this information and compresses it, providing high transmission  
speeds. Many Muratec units offer proprietary methods for faster transmissions  
between Muratec-manufactured units (see also MSE, SMSE).  
Byte — A group of digital elements, usually sent as eight bits to the byte.  
Ca ll r eser ve — Also called call request. An ITU-T standard fax feature which allows  
a user to request voice communication prior to, during or after transmission.  
DIP sw itch es — Dual in-line package switch; a two-position on/off switch. Many  
Muratec fax machines include DIP switches to control optional settings or features.  
3.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Effective p r in tin g w id th — The widest image that can be printed on a fax.  
J BIG — J oint Bi-level Image experts Group, the new ITU-T standard image data com-  
pression method. As J BIG compresses the data more efficiently than MMR, it is  
especially effective when transmitting halftone (grayscale) image document.  
(Of course, the compression ratio may vary with the image data.)  
Effective sca n w id th — The maximum width the scanner in a fax can scan  
during transmission.  
F a csim ile (or fa x) — A form of communication involving the scanning and decoding  
of a document into electrical signals and transmitting of the document, over tele-  
phone lines to another device which then reconstructs the signals to produce an exact  
duplicate of the document. Also, a machine that performs such communication.  
La ser p r in tin g — A plain-paper printing system. Toner is attached to a charged  
drum and an image is transferred onto plain paper through electrical currents, then  
fused with heat and pressure to produce a dry, permanent printout.  
LCD — Liquid crystal display. Used on some Muratec units for status displays.  
F a llba ck — Group 3 fax machines operate at the highest transmission speed possi-  
ble on a given telephone line. Muratec systems offer automatic fallback; if line  
quality drops during transmission, the fax machine will reduce speed to the fastest  
possible level.  
Lea sed lin e — See Private line.  
Loa d n u m ber — A number assigned to telecommunications equipment used in  
Canada; designed to help prevent overloading on a telephone circuit. See also  
Ringer equivalence number.  
F in e r esolu tion — 203H × 196V lpi. Also shown as  
G
3
F
(“Group 3 fine) on some  
fax units.  
Loca tion ID — See Station ID.  
Gr a ysca le — Not a level of resolution, but a method of scanning and transmitting  
halftone images. Fax machines with grayscale abilities interpret photographs in  
levels of gray between white and black. The transmitting fax machine must have  
grayscale ability to send a photographic image accurately, but the receiving  
machine does not need it to print the image.  
lp i — Lines per inch. The way fax image resolution is measured. (For example, see  
Normal resolution.)  
MH — Modified Huffman, the standard ITU-T Group 3 data compression method. A  
one-dimensional coding scheme that compresses data in a horizontal direction only.  
A feature of all Muratec fax machines, MH assures transmissions faster than one  
page per minute when communicating with other Group 3 units, regardless of man-  
ufacturer. See also MSE, SMSE.  
Gr ou p 3 — Refers to fax machines that use digital encoding. These units transmit  
one page in less than one minute and produce resolution of 203 × 98, 203 × 196, or  
203 × 392 lpi.  
Mod em — Modulator-demodulator. A device that converts digital data, like infor-  
mation from a fax machine, into an analog signal for transmission over ordinary  
(analog) telephone lines. A modem is included in a fax machine and allows it to be  
connected directly to a PSTN telephone line.  
Ha lfton e — See Grayscale.  
Ha n d sh a k in g — A data interchange between telecommunications and/or  
computer equipment that introduces” two systems to each other. For example,  
faxes use a handshaking protocol to identify the ITU-T group of each unit and to  
begin fax communication.  
Mon itor — A speaker in most Muratec fax machines which can allow one to hear  
the dialing process. This is not a speakerphone, because it has no microphone for  
speaking to the person being called; for regular two-way voice communication, one  
must use the handset. See also On-hook dialing.  
Hu b — See Relay broadcasting.  
Hz (or Her tz) — A measure of frequency equal to one cycle per second. Used in the  
specifications for a fax machine, it identifies the AC power the unit requires.  
MSE, SMSE — Muratecs proprietary data compression methods, allowing a Muratec-  
manufactured fax machine to transmit more quickly when communicating with  
another Muratec-manufactured unit. MSE and SMSE are features on many Muratec  
fax machines. See also MH.  
ITU-T — International Telecommunications Union – Telecommunications Sector.  
(Formerly known as CCITT, for Consultative Committee for International Telegraph  
and Telephone.) A telecommunications forum for member countries of the United  
Nations; its Study Group XIV established the primary groups for fax equipment, cov-  
ering communication protocol and transmission. Muratec Group 3 fax machines  
offer the fastest transmissions allowed by the ITU-T when communicating with other  
Group 3 units.  
Nor m a l r esolu tion — Shown as norm; 203H × 98V lpi. The default resolution  
mode for all Muratec fax machines.  
On e-tou ch d ia lin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for  
dialing with the touch of one key. See also Autodialing and Speed-dialing.  
ITU-T Test Docu m en t 1 — Also called the Slerexe (slehr-rehks) letter; sometimes  
erroneously called ITU-T Test Chart 1. An ITU-T standard document with a known  
black density which fax makers often use in testing, and subsequently publicizing,  
the transmission speeds of their fax machines.  
On -h ook d ia lin g — Dialing numbers by using the keypad on the fax unit without  
lifting a handset. On most Muratec fax models, one can do this either silently or by  
using the monitor. See also Monitor.  
Or igin a l d ocu m en t size — The largest (or smallest) document that can be fed  
safely through a fax machine.  
ITU-T V.29 a n d V.27 ter . — A standard set of communication procedures allowing  
fax machines to talk to all other units adhering to those standards.  
3.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Rela y br oa d ca stin g — Lets some Muratec fax machines store a document in  
P a p er sizes — All are width × length:  
internal memory, transmit the document to the memory of a remote hub” fax and  
then instruct that unit to relay (i. e., re-transmit) the document to each fax in a call  
group in the hub” unit. This feature speeds extremely high-volume fax communica-  
tion and allows a single command to initiate document transmission to hundreds of  
preprogrammed fax locations; also saves phone charges for the originating machine.  
Your machine can either serve as a hub” unit or initiate a relay broadcast.  
Letter-sized = 8.5×11.0″  
Legal-sized = 8.5×14.0″  
A5 = 5.8″ × 8.3″  
B5 = 7.2×10.1″  
A4 = 8.3×11.7″  
B4 = 10.1×17.0″  
A3 = 11.7×16.5″  
B3 = 14.3×20.3″  
P a sscod e — A four-digit code-number. On your fax machine, the protection pass-  
code lets the user limit access to fax operations in general, as well as certain  
settings and even documents readied for polling (in the latter case, only calling  
machines whose users enter the proper passcode will be able to poll the document.)  
Rem ote fa x m a ch in e — The machine on the other end” of a fax communication.  
REN — See Ringer equivalence number.  
P BX (or P ABX) — Private branch exchange; privately-owned telephone equipment  
serving a particular building, business or area. Many PBX systems use digital trans-  
mission lines which, unlike more common PSTN lines, are not compatible with fax  
machine use. The user should not connect a fax unit to a PBX without first checking  
with the system manufacturer or service representative.  
Resolu tion — The resolution of documents transmitted or copied by fax machines  
is measured by the number of horizontal (H) and vertical (V) lines per inch (lpi) the  
unit can print. A Muratec unit may offer one or more of these resolution levels:  
Normal  
Fine  
Superfine  
203H × 98V lpi  
203H × 196V lpi  
203H × 392V lpi  
P ollin g — Automatic transmission to a calling remote fax, or reception of a docu-  
ment from a remote fax set for this operation. Polling is convenient whenever a  
central unit must receive information from one or several remote faxes. The caller  
bears all telephone charges and prevents several remote units from calling at the  
same time. In database polling, a remote fax polls a document directly from the  
memory of a Muratec fax. (Regular polling requires the document to be physically in  
the polled faxs feeder.) See also Secure polling.  
Some Muratec units also offer grayscale transmission (see also Grayscale) for accu-  
rate reproduction of photographs and other shaded originals.  
Rin ger equ iva len ce n u m ber — Also called REN. A number assigned to telecom-  
munications equipment used in the United States; designed to prevent overloading  
on a telephone circuit. See also Load number.  
P r iva te lin e — (Or leased line.) A service offered by many telephone systems; pro-  
vides an exclusive phone circuit between two geographic points. A Muratec fax does  
not require a private line. See also PSTN.  
Sca n n in g w id th — See Effective scanning width.  
Secu r eMa il — Allows a Muratec fax user to send a document (usually something  
confidential) to, or receive one into, an electronic mail box.” The transmission is  
protected at the receiving Muratec fax by an access code; the receiving fax prints  
the document only when an authorized user enters the code.  
P r op r ieta r y — Non-standard. In fax, refers to a fax feature which works only in  
communications between same-branded fax machines.  
P STN Public switched telephone network; the most common type of telephone  
lines and service in use, in contrast to private or leased lines. A Muratec fax pro-  
vides fast, reliable data transmission over a PSTN line, and does not need a special or  
dedicated telephone line. See also Private line.  
Secu r e p ollin g Polling in which preset passcodes are checked between two  
machines before polling is allowed to take place.  
Sp eed -d ia lin g — Allows the fax user to store frequently used fax numbers for dial-  
ing with the touch of three keys — an identifier key (either * or #) and then a  
two-digit code — for each number. See also Autodialing and One-touch dialing.  
RCR — Receive confirmation report. An RCR is your assurance that the document  
you transmitted was received. The RCR prints after your transmission, identifying  
the receiving unit and recording the date, time, transmission mode, number of  
pages sent and the result. The RCR is an exclusive feature of Muratec fax machines  
and is available only when transmitting to other, compatible Muratec fax machines.  
See also TCR.  
Sta tion ID — (Also called Location ID or Receiver ID.) An autodialer feature which  
lets the fax user enter a descriptive name to correspond with the number in an  
autodialer entry. For example, rather than entering only 1-972-555-3465, one can  
enter that number and a name, such as Dallas Branch Office. (Many Muratec mod-  
els with this feature allow entry of both upper-case and lower-case letters, for  
greater ease of reading.)  
Receiver ID — See Station ID.  
Red ia lin g — The dialing again, either manually or automatically controlled, of the  
most recently dialed fax or phone number. Automatic redialing follows an unsuc-  
cessful dialing attempt.  
Su bscr iber ID — A fax machines telephone number, as identified by a user set-  
ting. See TTI.  
3.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J ust in case …  
Su p er fin e r esolu tion — 203H × 392V lpi. Your Muratec fax machines superfine  
transmission mode is Group-3-compatible, not the more limited proprietary version.  
TCR — Transmit confirmation report; this provides proof that your Muratec fax did  
send the document you set for transmission. Printed after transmission, the TCR  
also identifies the telephone number to which the fax sent the document, plus the  
actual time of transmission and how many pages the unit transmitted. See also RCR.  
Th er m a l (p a p er ) p r in tin g — A thermal head heats chemically treated, thermally  
sensitive paper in patterns conforming to the image the machine has scanned, cre-  
ating a printed image. Thermal papers tendency to discolor and fade, in addition to  
its curliness and the usual difficulty in writing on it, have made this method consid-  
erably less popular than plain-paper fax printing — particularly as plain-paper fax  
machines have dropped sharply in price.  
TTI — Transmit terminal identifier. A user-programmable line of information sent  
automatically with every page a fax machine sends; it appears at the top of each  
page printed by the receiving unit.  
Tr a n sm ission sp eed How fast a fax machine is sending a fax document. This  
speed depends upon the modem speed of each unit, the resolution setting, the con-  
tent of the document, the encoding technique and the condition of the phone line  
(clean, noisy, etc.) Any change in any one of these five conditions will affect the  
speed, perhaps significantly.  
Wh ite-lin e sk ip — A technique used to speed up fax transmission by bypassing  
redundant areas, such as white space.  
3.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Specifications  
Typ e: High-speed facsimile transmitter and receiver for home and office use.  
P h on e lin e: Normal Public Switched Telephone Line (PSTN) or equivalent.  
F -150 m od em :  
P r in tin g w id th : 8.2.  
F -150 sca n n in g w id th : 9.9or 8.2, user-selectable.  
F -120 a n d F -100 sca n n in g w id th : 8.2.  
Sca n n in g m eth od : Flatbed CCD.  
33,600, 31,200, 28,800, 26,400, 24,000, 21,600, 19,200, 16,800, 14,400, 12,000,  
9,600, 7,200, 4,800 and 2,400 bps per ITU-T V.34.  
,
P r in tin g m eth od : Dry, electrophotographic (laser) process.  
14,400 bps with fallback to 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800 and 2,400 bps per ITU-T  
V.33, V.17, V.29 and V.27 ter.  
,
Con su m a bles yield : Drum cartridge, 20,000 pages; regular toner cartridge, 5,500  
pages; starter toner cartridge, 3,600 pages.***  
F -120 a n d F -100 m od em : 14,400 bps with fallback to 12,000, 9,600, 7,200, 4,800  
and 2,400 bps per ITU-T V.33, V.17, V.29 and V.27 ter.  
Recor d in g p a p er ca p a city: Paper cassette, 500 letter-sized sheets; multipurpose  
tray, 150 letter- or legal-sized sheets.  
,
Com p a tibility: ITU-T Group 3.  
Accep ta ble d ocu m en t size (width × height):  
Da ta com p r ession m eth od : ITU-T-standard J BIG * (F-150 only), MMR and MR,  
Murata-proprietary MSE.  
Single sheet — 11.0×35.4maximum, 5.8×4.1minimum.  
Two or more sheets — 10.1×14.4maximum, 5.8×4.1minimum.  
F -150 tr a n sm ission sp eed : 3 seconds per page.**  
F -150 w eigh t: 40.3 pounds.  
F -120 a n d F -100 tr a n sm ission sp eed : 6 seconds per page.**  
Docu m en t feed er ca p a city: 50 pages (20-pound bond paper).  
F -120 a n d F -100 w eigh t: 39.8 pounds.  
Dim en sion s (width × depth × height): 19.2×20.4×14.6.  
P ow er : 120V ± 10%, 50–60 Hz.  
Resolu tion (in lpi, horizontal × vertical): Normal, 203 × 98; fine, 203 × 196;  
superfine, 203 × 392; Muratec-proprietary, 305 × 293.  
*
On F-150, faxing with on-hook or a handset disables J BIG” compression method and compresses the image data  
with normal ITU-T MMR.  
Gr a ysca le: 64-level.  
** Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax machine. Your transmission times will vary, but  
your Muratec fax machine always will provide the fastest transmission speeds possible under ITU-T guidelines and  
phone-line conditions.  
*** Based on letter-sized sheets, 4% document coverage and continuous printing.  
AI.1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Regulatory information  
If problems arise  
United States of America  
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remote it from your telephone  
line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they may temporarily  
stop service. When practical, they will notify you before this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be  
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the opportunity to correct the problem and will be  
informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) information  
Ringer Equivalence Number (RENs): AC REN, 2.4B (F-150) or 3.2B (F-120 or F-100); DC REN, 0.3.  
This facsimile machine has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
A
digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a  
residential installation.  
In the event repairs are ever needed on your fax machine, they should be done by Muratec America, Inc., or an  
authorized representative of Muratec America, Inc. For information, contact the Muratec Customer Support Center at  
972-364-3350 (from the U. S. only).  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation.  
Canada  
If this equipment causes interference in radio or television reception (which can be determined by turning the equip-  
ment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Industry Canada (IC) regulations  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
IC Load Number (LN): F-150, 0.9 or F-120, 18.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
IC Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): F-100, 0.9.  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class  
A
limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the  
interference-causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom of this equipment is a label that contains, among  
other information, the FCC registration number and REN for this equipment. If so requested, you must provide this infor-  
mation to the telephone company.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de  
Classe  
A
prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: Appareils Numériques,” NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre  
des Communications.  
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be  
connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part-68-compliant.  
Notice: The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means  
the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements.  
The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction.  
Telephone company procedures  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local  
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.  
Sometimes, the companys inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended with a certi-  
fied connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with these  
coniditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can. In order to do this, it may occasionally  
have to make changes in its equipment, operations or procedures. If these changes might affect your service or the oper-  
ation of your equipment, the telephone company will give you notice, in writing, to allow you to make any changes  
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you have any questions about your telephone line, such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the  
telephone company will provide this information upon request.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the  
supplier. Any equipment malfunction, or repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you about the  
equipment which you have connected to your telephone line. Upon request of the telephone company, provide the FCC  
registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment which is connected to your line. Both  
of these numbers are listed on the equipment label attached to your fax machine.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines  
and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important in  
rural areas.  
The sum of all RENS on your telephone line should be fewer than five (5) in order to assure proper service from the tele-  
phone company. Sometimes, a sum of five (5) may not be usable on a given telephone line.  
Ca u tion : Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric  
inspection authority or electrician.  
Note:  
This equipment is hearing-aid-compatible (HAC).  
Note:  
When the F-150 or F-120 went through the IC certification process, Industry Canada assigned Load Numbers;  
however, before the F-100 went through the same process, Industry Canada chose instead to assign Ringer  
Equivalence Numbers. The following two paragraphs explain the two specifications.  
Notice: The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device to send any message via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains,  
either in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the  
date and time it was sent and an identification of the business or other identity, or other individual sending  
the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, entity or individual. For  
instructions on programming this information (the TTI”) into your fax machine, see pages 1.10–1.12.  
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a  
telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combina-  
tion of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the LNs of all the devices doesnt exceed 100.  
The IC LN for the F-150 is 0.9 or F-120 is 18.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number  
of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combi-  
nation of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5. The IC REN  
for the F-100 is 0.9.  
Type of service  
Your fax is designed for use on standard-device telephone lines. The fax connects to the telephone line with a standard  
line called the USOC RJ -11. Connection to telephone-company-provided coin service (central-office-implemented systems).  
Connection to party line service is subject to State tariffs.  
AI.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Index  
A
D
Activity journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29  
Alphanumeric directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See EasyDial  
Answering, setting number of rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
Attaching (your) second phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Autodialer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8–2.16, 2.17  
Database polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Polling  
Date and time, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11  
Delayed transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21–2.23  
Dialing mode (pulse or tone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11  
Directory dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See EasyDial  
Distinctive ring detection (DRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33–2.34  
Document guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Document, inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Drum cartridge, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6–1.7  
Drum counter, resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Dual access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See TriAccess  
B
Batch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24–2.26, 2.51  
Block J unk Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52–2.54  
Broadcasting, relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19–2.20, 2.39–2.40  
C
E
Call groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9, 2.15  
Call request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34–2.35  
Call-waiting, possible trouble with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Cancelling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17, 2.22  
Cleaning your fax machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11–3.12  
Clearing jams  
EasyDial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15–2.16, 2.17  
EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.12  
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, AI.1  
Electrical surge suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
Entering date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11  
Entering TTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.11  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Communications problems  
Extension telephone (yours; not included with fax machine)  
Document, original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2  
Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2–3.3  
Clearing settings before using EasyStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Closed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52  
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Fax reception while using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
CODE (U4/CODE) key, using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3  
Communications problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6–3.10  
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6  
Check Message” printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10  
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8–3.9  
Error codes, printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8–3.9  
Confidential communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.46–2.49, 2.52  
Confirmation reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Confirmation stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Continuous polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Polling  
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2, 1.4–1.5  
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20  
Copy and print reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3–2.5  
Cover page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28  
Custom setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.56–2.57  
F
Fax Ready mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
Fine resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.13, 2.2  
G
Grayscale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.13, 2.2  
H
Handset (optional), summary of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
HOLD, using in telephone calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
AI.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
I
P
Inserting pages (for faxing or copying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14, 1.20  
Installation  
Page numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
Paper cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Paper for printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7  
Passcode, protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
Pause character, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 , 2.8  
PBX, using with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14  
Phone and electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
PIN mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49–2.51  
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31–2.33, 2.40–2.42  
Being polled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32  
Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32  
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31  
Passcode protection for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33, 2.44–2.45, 2.49  
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, AI.1  
Printing machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Printing a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Print and copy reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3–2.5  
Print quality problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4–3.5  
Program list, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Programmable one-touch keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36–2.43  
Protection passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44  
AC power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6–1.7  
Fax machine, location of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
Handset and handset cradle (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Phone line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Paper for printouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7–1.8  
Paper-handling parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8  
Telephone (yours) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9  
Toner cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6–1.7  
J
J ammed paper, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2–3.3  
J ournal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29  
“J unk fax,” blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52–2.54  
L
Language, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Larger documents, adjusting machine for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Light contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13  
Limited warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.6  
Line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Installation  
Location ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 2.9–2.10, 2.11, 2.14–2.15  
R
RCRs (receive confirmation reports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Receiving faxes (basic instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18–1.19  
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16–1.17  
Reduction, print and copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3–2.5  
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.2  
Relay broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19–2.20, 2.39–2.40  
Reports, confirmation (TCR and RCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Requirements, phone and electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6, AI.1  
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.13, 2.2  
Review Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17, 2.22  
Rings, setting number on which to answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5  
M
Mailboxes, SecureMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Confidential transmission  
Making copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20  
Memory transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14–1.15  
Monitor speaker, setting volume of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8–1.9  
Multipurpose tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7, 1.8  
N
Normal resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.13, 2.2  
Numbering pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
O
OneLine + distinctive ring detection (DRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33–2.34  
One-touch numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 2.9–2.12  
See also Programmable one-touch keys  
Operation protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.44–2.45  
Out-of-paper reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19  
AI.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
S
Security reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.45–2.46  
Security transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.52  
Sending faxes (basic instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13–1.17  
Settings list, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7  
Silent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Speaker, monitor, setting volume of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8–1.9  
Special dialing characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8  
Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28–2.35  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.1  
Speed-dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8, 2.12–2.15  
Stamp, transmission confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6  
Subscriber ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
Superfine resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1, 1.13, 2.2  
Surge suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
T
TCRs (transmit confirmation reports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30  
Telephone features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17  
Time and date, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9–1.10  
Toner cartridge, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6–1.7  
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Sending faxes  
TriAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2–3.10  
Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10  
U
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2  
User settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10–1.12, 2.2–2.7  
V
Voice mail, possible trouble with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14  
Volume setting for monitor speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8–1.9  
Voltage requirements and power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6  
W
Warranty, limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI.6  
AI.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Limited warranty  
T
his warranty is made by Muratec America, Inc. (hereafter referred to as Muratec”). This warranty is  
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE, AND EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, MURATEC  
MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
valid only on Muratec products purchased and used in the United States of America. This warranty  
applies to the product only while owned and used by the original purchaser (Customer). If ownership of  
the product is transferred, this warranty terminates. This warranty does not apply to any product in use  
for rental purposes.  
This Muratec product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for ninety (90) days  
commencing the date of original Customer purchase. If the product is defective in material and/or work-  
manship (normal wear and tear excepted) during the warranty period, Muratec or its authorized  
representative will, during Muratecs established service availability hours, make necessary adjustments  
and repairs, including, at Muratecs option, installation of replacement parts. Muratecs service availabil-  
ity hours are 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Central time) Monday through Friday, excluding Muratec-recognized  
holidays. Muratec will complete the necessary adjustments and repairs within a reasonable time period,  
as dictated by the nature of the problem and by Muratecs service schedule. Replacement parts may have  
been used and/or reconditioned. Parts that have been replaced will remain the property of Muratec. This  
warranty is subject to the OBLIGATIONS and EXCLUSIONS set forth.  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR  
A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM COURSE OF  
DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE), AND MURATEC EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES NOT STATED HEREIN. IN THE  
EVENT THE PRODUCT IS NOT FREE FROM DEFECTS AS WARRANTED ABOVE, THE CUSTOMERS SOLE REMEDY SHALL BE  
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED ABOVE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL MURATEC BE LIABLE TO THE CUS-  
TOMER, OR TO ANY USER, FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE  
THE MURATEC PRODUCT, EVEN IF MURATEC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGES.  
Some States do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, and some  
States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclu-  
sions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other  
rights which vary from State to State.  
Obligations  
1. This warranty will be honored only on presentation of the original dated authorized Muratec bill of sale  
or Muratec dealer bill of sale or sales slip to an authorized Muratec service representative or service  
center. For the name of your authorized service center, contact Muratec (from the United States, call  
1-972-364-3350; from Canada, check your in-box materials for the number to call).  
2. During the warranty period, the Customer must notify Muratec by telephone of any defective product  
material and/or workmanship.  
3. Transportation (including prepayment of freight and insurance charges) of the product to and from an  
authorized service center, designated by Muratec, is the responsibility of the Customer.  
4. If Muratec provides maintenance or responds to a call which is outside the scope of this warranty, such  
maintenance shall be billed to the Customer at Muratecs then-current rates for maintenance and  
parts and shall be due and payable in full upon receipt of invoice.  
Exclusions  
1. This warranty shall not cover a product with missing or altered original identification marks.  
2. This warranty applies only to products that the purchaser has properly installed, adjusted and oper-  
ated in accordance with the instructions set forth in or provided with product literature. This warranty  
does not apply to any product which has been subjected to tampering, alteration, misuse, abuse,  
neglect, improper installation or transportation damage. Nor does it apply to costs for any service  
requested for demonstration or to confirm proper operation of this product.  
3. The warranty shall not apply to adjustments, repairs or replacements necessitated by any cause  
beyond the control of Muratec (whether foreseeable or not) including, but not limited to, any malfunc-  
tion, defects or failure caused by or resulting from any of the following: improper unpacking or  
installation, unauthorized service or parts, or improper maintenance or cleaning, modification or  
repair by the Customer, accident (including, without limitation, unavoidable accidents), fire, flood or  
other Acts of God, improper telephone or electrical power or surges thereof, interconnection with or use  
of non-compatible equipment or supplies (including paper), or placement of the product in an area  
which does not conform to Muratec space, electrical and/or environmental requirements.  
4. Muratec will not be required to make adjustments, repairs or replacements if the product is installed  
or used at a location deemed by Muratec to be hazardous to health or safety, or if Muratec is not pro-  
vided with free and reasonable access to the product and a telephone during service availability hours,  
or if the product location is not accessible by an authorized Muratec service vehicle.  
AI.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix and index  
Safety information  
Laser safety  
Warning labels  
This fax machine contains a page printer which operates by means of a laser. There  
is no possibility of danger from the laser, provided the fax machine is operated  
according to the instructions provided in this manual.  
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined with a protective housing,  
the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.  
Internal laser radiation information  
For all users  
Maximum radiation power: 5.0 × 10-4  
(W  
)
Wavelength: 770–810 (nm)  
This is a Class IIIb laser diode assembly that has an invisible laser beam. The  
printer head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM. Therefore, the printer head unit  
should not be opened under any circumstances.  
For United States users  
Laser safety  
This fax is certified as a Cla ss 1 laser product under the  
U
.
S. Dep a r tm en t of  
Hea lth a n d Hu m a n Ser vices (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according  
to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. This means that the fax machine does  
not produce hazardous laser radiation.  
CDRH regulations  
The Cen ter for Devices a n d Ra d iologica l Hea lth (CDRH) of the  
U
.
S. Food and  
Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976.  
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The labels  
shown in the graphic (see right column) indicates compliance with the CDRH regula-  
tions and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.  
Wa r n in g: Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radia-  
tion exposure.  
AI.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Multiquip Automobile Parts HHXD5 User Manual
Musical Fidelity Home Theater System AMS35I User Manual
NEC DVD Player 16x User Manual
NEC TV Mount NP04WK User Manual
Nortel Networks Switch ELO ES24 User Manual
Omega Juicer VRT330 User Manual
Omega Vehicle Security Battery Charger SMCJ J User Manual
Omron Network Card CJ1W ETN21 User Manual
Onkyo DVD Player DV S353 User Manual
Otter Products Carrying Case 83501 User Manual